You are on page 1of 209

lOMoARcPSD|36395062

BCE 223L SIM 22 23 - The materials used for the


construction of building can be termed as the building
Hydrology (University of Mindanao)

Studocu is not sponsored or endorsed by any college or university


Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

UNIVERSITY OF MINDANAO
College of Engineering Education
Civil Engineering Program

Physically Distanced but Academically Engaged

Self-Instructional Manual (SIM) for


Self-Directed Learning (SDL)

Course/Subject: : BCE 223L – CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS


AND TESTING
Name of Teacher: ENGR. SHOWNA LEE T. SALES

THIS SIM/SDL MANUAL IS A DRAFT VERSION ONLY; NOT FOR REPRODUCTION AND
DISTRIBUTION OUTSIDE OF ITS INTENDED USE. THIS IS INTENDED ONLY FOR THE USE OF
THE STUDENTS WHO ARE OFFICIALLY ENROLLED IN THE COURSE/SUBJECT.
EXPECT REVISIONS OF THE MANUAL.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

PAGE
Cover Page ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 1
Table of Contents……………………………………………………………………………………….. 2
Course Outline………………………………………………………………………………………… ….. 4
Course Outline Policy…………………………………………………………………………………. 4
Course Information……………………………………………………………………………………. 6

Topic/ Activity
Unit Learning Outcomes- Unit 1
Big Picture in Focus: ULO-1a…………………………………………………………………..….. 7
Metalanguage…………………………………………………………………………………... 7
Essential Knowledge………………………………………………………………………… 7
INTRODUCTION: Building Stones, Structural Clay and Aggregates
1. Types and Properties of Building Stones, Structural Clay …... 8
2. Aggregates ……………………………………………………………………….. 15
3. Reducing Field Sample of Aggregates to Testing Size …………. 15
4. Determination of Surface Moisture of Coarse Aggregates …….. 18
5. Sieve Analysis of Coarse Aggregates …………………………………… 20
6. Determination of Unit Weight of Aggregates ……………………….. 25
7. Specific Gravity Determination – FA & C ……………………………… 26
8. Absorption Determination- FA & CA ……………………………………. 26
9. Unit Weight Determination- FA & CA ………………………………….. 32
10. Moisture Content Determination- FA & CA …………………………. 37
11. Determination of Fineness Modulus ……………………………………. 39
12. Soundness Test ………………………………………………………………….. 43
13. Test for Organic Impurities ………………………………………………….. 47
14. Abrasion Test …………………………………………………………………….. 50
SELF HELP ………………………………………………………………………………………. 53
Let’s Check …………………………………………………………………………………….. 53
Let’s Analyze …………………………………………………………………………………. 54.
In a Nutshell ………………………………………………………………………………….. 54
Q & A Lists …………………………………………………………………………………….. 55
Keyword Index …………………………………………………………………………….. 56

Unit Learning Outcomes – Unit 2


Big Picture in Focus: ULO-2a…………………………………………………………………..….. 57
Metalanguage…………………………………………………………………………………... 57
Essential Knowledge………………………………………………………………………… 57
INTODUCTION : Cement and Concrete
1. Types of Cement Used in Construction ………………………………………. 57
2. Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle………………………………………………. 72
3. Common Concrete Mix Proportion and Its Application…………………. 74
4. Portland and Hydraulic Cement Concrete …………………………………… 91
5. Admixtures ……………………………………………………….…………………….. 93
6. Completed Pavement …………………………………………………………………. 106

SELF HELP ……………………………………………………………………………………… 109


Let’s Check …………………………………………………………………………………….. 109
Let’s Analyze …………………………………………………………………………………. 110
In a Nutshell ………………………………………………………………………………….. 111
Q & A Lists …………………………………………………………………………………….. 111
Keyword Index …………………………………………………………………………….. 111
Page 2 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Unit Learning Outcomes- Unit 3


Big Picture in Focus: ULO-3a…………………………………………………………………..….. 112
Metalanguage…………………………………………………………………………………... 112
Essential Knowledge………………………………………………………………………… 112
INTRODUCTION: Metals and Woods
1. Metals: Wrought Iron, Cast Iron, Steel and Alloys ….…………… 112
2. Quality Test for Bending, Tension and Chemical Analysis …… 123
3. Reinforcing Steel………………………………………………………………. 138
4. Markings ………………………………..………………………………………… 143
5. Basic Properties ……………………………………………………………….. 144
6. Tensile Test ……………… ……………………………………………………. 146
7. Wood: Characteristics and It’s Physical Properties ……………. 155
8. Testing Requirements ………………………………………………………. 157
SELF HELP …………………………………………………………………………………….. 187
Let’s Check …………………………………………………………………………………….. 187
Let’s Analyze …………………………………………………………………………………. 188
In a Nutshell ………………………………………………………………………………….. 188
Q & A Lists …………………………………………………………………………………….. 189
Keyword Index …………………………………………………………………………….. 189

Unit Learning Outcomes- Unit 4


Big Picture in Focus: ULO-1a…………………………………………………………………..….. 190
Metalanguage…………………………………………………………………………………... 190
Essential Knowledge………………………………………………………………………… 190
INTRODUCTION: Asphalts
1. Bituminous Materials ………..……………………………………………… 190
2. Composition of Asphalts……………………………………………………. 193
3. Kinds and Uses of Asphalt ………………………………………………… 196
4. Quality of Bituminous Materials Used in Different
Mixtures/Surfaces ……………………………………………………………. 198
5. Bituminous Mixing Plants …………………………………………………. 203
6. Laboratory Tests for Bituminous Materials ……………………….. 206
SELF HELP ……………………………………………………………………………………… 225
Let’s Check …………………………………………………………………………………….. 225
Let’s Analyze ……………………………………………………………………………….…. 225
In a Nutshell …………………………………………………………………………………... 226
Q & A Lists ……………………………………………………………………………………... 226
Keyword Index ……………………………………………………………………………… 227

Page 3 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

COURSE OUTLINE: BCE 223L – CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND TESTING

Course Coordinator: Engr. Showna Lee T. Sales


Email: ssales@umindanao.edu.ph
Student Consultation: Through Google Hangouts
Mobile: N/A
Phone: (082) 2961084 or local 131 Office
Effectivity Date: August 8, 2022
Mode of Delivery: Blended (On-Line with face to face or virtual sessions)
Time Frame: 36 Hours lecture and 54 Hours laboratory
Student Workload: Expected Self-Directed Learning
Requisites: CE 117
Co- requisite: BCE 222
Credit: 2 units lecture, 1unit laboratory
Attendance Requirements: A minimum of 95% attendance is required at all scheduled Virtual
or face to face sessions.

COURSE OUTLINE POLICY

Areas of Concern Details


Contact and Non-contact This 2-unit and 1-unit laboratory course self-instructional
Hours manual is designed for blended learning mode of instructional
delivery with scheduled face to face or virtual sessions. The
expected number of hours will be 36 hours lecture and 54
hours laboratory including the face to face or virtual sessions.
The expected number of hours will be 90 including the face-
to-face or virtual sessions. The face-to-face sessions shall
include the summative assessment tasks (exams) since this
course is crucial in the licensure examination for civil
engineers.
Assessment Task Submission Submission of assessment tasks shall be on 3rd, 5th, 7th and
9th week of the term. The assessment paper shall be attached
with a cover page indicating the title of the assessment task (if
the task is performance), the name of the course coordinator,
date of submission and name of the student. The document
should be emailed to the course coordinator. It is also
expected that you already paid your tuition and other fees
before the submission of the assessment task.

If the assessment task is done in real time through the features


in the Blackboard Learning Management System, the schedule
shall be arranged ahead of time by the course coordinator.

Since this course is included in the licensure examination for


civil engineers, you will be required to take the exam inside
the University. This should be scheduled ahead of time by your
course coordinator. This is non-negotiable for all licensure-
based programs.
Turnitin Submission To ensure honesty and authenticity, all assessment tasks are
(if necessary) required to be submitted through Turnitin with a maximum
similarity index of 30% allowed. This means that if your paper
goes beyond 30%, the students will either opt to redo her/his
Page 4 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

paper or explain in writing addressed to the course


coordinator the reasons for the similarity. In addition, if the
paper has reached more than 30% similarity index, the
student may be called for a disciplinary action in accordance
with the University’s OPM on Intellectual and Academic
Honesty.

Please note that academic dishonesty such as cheating and


commissioning other students or people to complete the task
for you have severe punishments (reprimand, warning,
expulsion).
Penalties for Late The score for an assessment item submitted after the
Assignments/Assessments designated time on the due date, without an approved
extension of time, will be reduced by 5% of the possible
maximum score for that assessment item for each day or part
day that the assessment item is late.

However, if the late submission of assessment paper has a


valid reason, a letter of explanation should be submitted and
approved by the course coordinator. If necessary, you will also
be required to present/attach
evidences.
Return of Assignments/ Assessment tasks will be returned to you two (2) weeks
Assessments after the submission. This will be returned by email or via
Blackboard portal.

For group assessment tasks, the course coordinator will


require some or few of the students for online or virtual
sessions to ask clarificatory questions to validate the
originality of the assessment task submitted and to ensure
that all the group members are involved.
Assignment Resubmission You should request in writing addressed to the course
coordinator his/her intention to resubmit an assessment task.
The resubmission is premised on the student’s failure to
comply with the similarity index and other reasonable
grounds such as academic literacy standards or other
reasonable circumstances e.g.
illness, accidents financial constraints.
Re-marking of Assessment You should request in writing addressed to the program
Papers and Appeal coordinator your intention to appeal or contest the score
given to an assessment task. The letter should explicitly
explain the reasons/points to contest the grade. The program
coordinator shall communicate with the students on the
approval and disapproval of the
request.

If disapproved by the course coordinator, you can


elevate your case to the program head or the dean with
the original letter of request. The final decision will
come from the dean of the college.
Grading System All culled from BlackBoard sessions and traditional
contact

Page 5 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Submission of the final grades shall follow the usual


University system and procedures.
Preferred Referencing Style Depends on the discipline; if uncertain or inadequate,
use the general practice of the APA 6th Edition.
Student Communication You are required to create a umindanao email account which
is a requirement to access the BlackBoard portal.
Then, the course coordinator shall enroll the
students to have access to the materials and resources of the
course. All communication formats: chat, submission of
assessment tasks, requests etc. shall be through the portal and
other university recognized platforms.

You can also meet the course coordinator in person through


the scheduled face to face sessions to raise
your issues and concerns.

For students who have not created their student email,


please contact the course coordinator or program head.
Contact Details of the Dean Dr. Charlito L. Cañesares
Email: clcanesares@umindanao.edu.ph
Phone: (082) 296-1084 or 300-5456 loc. 133
Contact Details of the Engr. Showna Lee T. Sales
Program Email: ssales@umindanao.edu.ph
Head Phone: (082) 296-1084 or 300-5456 loc. 133
Students with Special Needs Students with special needs shall communicate with the
course coordinator about the nature of his or her special
needs. Depending on the nature of the need, the course
coordinator with the approval of the program coordinator
may provide alternative assessment tasks or extension of the
deadline of submission of assessment tasks. However, the
alternative assessment tasks should still be in the service of
achieving the desired course learning outcomes.
Help Desk Contact

Jessica Dagohoy
CEE cee@umindanao.edu.ph

Page 6 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

082-2272902
Library Contact Brigida E. Bacani
library@umindanao.edu.ph
09513766681
GSTC Contact Ronadora E. Deala, RPsy, RPm, RGC, LPT
ronadora_deala@umindanao.edu.ph
09212122846

Silvino P. Josol
gstcmain@umindanao.edu.ph
0906075772

Course Information – see/download course syllabus in the Blackboard LMS

CC’s Voice: Hello prospective engineers! Welcome to this course BCE 223L: Construction
Materials and Testing. By now, I am confident that you really wanted to become
a civil engineer and that you have visualized yourself with professional expertise
and ethical responsibility in the practice of the profession. Furthermore, show
dedication and initiative in research and innovation or entrepreneurial ventures,
and professional development.
CO: Upon completion of this course, you are expected to:
CO1. Recognize the physical and structural properties for most common and
advanced construction materials
CO 2. Conduct experiments on common construction materials according to
international standards such as the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM)
CO 3. Evaluate the results of the test of common construction material

Let us begin!
BIG PICTURE
Week 1 to 3: Unit Learning Outcomes 1 (ULO 1): At the end of the unit, you are expected to:

a. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the properties and behaviors of most


common and advance construction material such as building stones, structural clay
and aggregates.
b. Conduct the methods, procedures and formulas of different experiments on common
construction materials according to international standards such as ASTM & AASTHO.

Big Picture inULO


Focus
1a. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the properties and
behaviors of most common and advance construction material such as building
stones, structural clay and aggregates

Metalanguage

This section deals with the study of different types and properties of construction materials such
as building stones, structural clay and aggregates.

Page 7 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Please proceed immediately to the “Essential Knowledge”.

Essential Knowledge
To perform the aforesaid big picture (unit learning outcomes) for the first three (3) weeks of the
course, you need to fully understand the following essential knowledge that will be laid down in
the succeeding pages. Please note that you are not limited to exclusively refer to these resources.
Thus, you are expected to utilize other books, research articles and other resources that are
available in the university’s library e.g. ebrary, search.proquest.com etc.
INTRODUCTION

Building material is any material which is used for construction purposes. This can be classified
as natural or synthetic. Many naturally occurring substances such as rocks, clay, sand and wood ,
even twigs and leaves, have been used for construction. Apart from naturally occurring materials,
many man-made products are in use, some more and some less synthetic. The manufacturing of
building materials is an established industry in many countries and the use of these materials is
typically segmented into specific specialty trades, such as carpentry, insulation, plumbing, and
roofing work.

TYPES AND PROPERTIES OF BUILDING STONES & STRUCTURAL CLAY

I. Building Stones
Stones are naturally occurring compact, solid and massive material that make the crust of
the earth. Technically, the stones are called as rocks. The rocks occur in great variety. The
rocks possess suitable properties often find use in building stones. It follows that all
building stones are rocks in nature, all rocks may not be useful as building stones.
➢ Classification of Stones
A. Geological Classification
This classification is based on mode of formation of the rock from which building
stones are obtained. Three main group recognized are:
I) Igneous Rocks - those rocks of the earth that have been formed by the
natural process of cooling and crystallization from originally hot and
molten magma. Granite, Gabbro, Basalt, Diorite and Obsidian are some
of the examples of Igneous Rocks.
II) Sedimentary Rocks - are formed from any type of preexisting rocks by a
simple process of breakdown into smaller particles under the influence of
natural agencies like wind, water and ice and atmospheric gases. This type
of rocks includes Conglomerate, Sandstone, Siltstone, Shale, etc.
III) Metamorphic Rocks - These are originally either igneous or sedimentary
rocks. The process for their change under the influence of increased
temperature, pressure, and chemical environment is called
metamorphism. The most well-known examples of metamorphic rocks
are marble and slate.

B. Physical Classification
The basis for such a classification is the physical properties of rocks, the manner
and arrangement of different particles and mass forming a stone. They classified
as follows:

Page 8 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

I) Foliated Rocks - show definite parallel arrangement of minerals showing


a tendency to split in a specific direction. Examples are gneiss, and schist.
II) Stratified Rocks - formed due to the splitting of parallel layers of
sedimentary rocks. They exhibit distinct layers which can be separated.
The plane of separation is called as a cleavage plane. Examples are
limestone, slate, and sandstone.
III) Unstratified Rocks - are granular or crystalline structure and become
solid and cooling. They do not show any sign of strata. Examples are
igneous rocks like granite, basalt, etc.

C. Chemical Classification
The presence of chemical constituents in the rocks is the basis for their type of
classification. they are as follows:
I) Argillaceous Rocks - clay and alumina is the main constituents. Examples
of the argillaceous rocks are slate, laterite, etc.
II) Siliceous Rocks - in this type, silica is the main constituent. The presence
of the silica in the free state is called sand, and in the combined state is
silicate. Examples of the silicate rocks are sandstone, quartzite, etc.
III) Calcareous Rocks - calcium carbonate or lime is the main constituents in
these rocks. They are readily acted upon by dilute HCL. Examples are
limestone, marble, etc.

II. Structural Clay


Structural Clay is a widely used material in the construction Industry. It is a recyclable
and sustainable product, it is fire resistant and the color ranges from light brown to burnt
red. The various types of clay products used in the construction industry are:
1. Brick – is extensively used in the construction of the external and internal walls of the
building where they are joined with cement plaster.
2. Terracotta – is used as a roofing material and external natural tile cladding material
to create the feel of exposed brick work.
3. Hollow Block Tile – are used to create the external walls of the building and are very
good insulators of sound and heat.
4. Paver Blocks – are used in driveways and landscaped gardens. They are light in
weight, strong and are usually in the form of interlocking tiles.
5. Brick Glazed Tile – Glazed brick tiles are used as an external cladding material so as
to give the look of exposed brick work.
6. Roofing Material – Clay is used as roofing material in many houses having sloped
roofs. This prevents the entry of water into the interiors. It is mainly used in areas
having heavy rainfall.

III. Properties of Building Materials


A. Physical Properties
These are the properties required to estimate the quality and condition of the material
without any external force. The physical properties of engineering materials are as
follows:
• Bulk Density is the ratio of mass to the volume of the material in its natural state that is
including voids and pores. It is expressed in kg/m3. Bulk density influences the
mechanical properties of materials like strength, heat and conductivity etc.
Page 9 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

• Porosity gives the volume of the material occupied by pores. It is the ratio of volume of
pores to the volume of material. Porosity influences many properties like thermal
conductivity, strength, bulk density, durability etc.
• Durability is the property of a material to withstand against the combined action of
atmospheric and other factors. If the material is more durable, it will be useful for longer
life. Maintenance cost of material is dependent of durability.
• Specific Gravity is the ratio of mass of given substance to the mass of water at 4oC for
the equal volumes.
• Fire resistance is the ability to withstand against fire without changing its shape and
other properties. Fire resistance of a material is tested by the combined actions of water
and fire. Fireproof materials should provide more safety in case of fire.
• Frost resistance is the ability of a material to resist freezing or thawing. It depends upon
the density and bulk density of material. Denser materials will have more frost resistance.
Moist materials have low frost resistance and they lose their strength in freezing and
become brittle.
• Weathering Resistance is the property of a material to withstand against all
atmospheric actions without losing its strength and shape. Weathering effects the
durability of material. For example, corrosion occurs in iron due to weathering. To resist
this paint layer is provided.
• Spalling Resistance is the ability of a material to undergo certain number of cycles of
sharp temperature variations without failing. It is the dependent of coefficient of linear
expansion.
• Water Absorption is the capacity of a material to absorb and retain water in it. It is
expressed in % of weight of dry material. It depends up on the size, shape and number of
pores of material.
• Water Permeability is the ability of a material to permit water through it.
• Hygroscopicity is the property of a material to absorb water vapor from the air. It
depends on the relative humidity, porosity, air temperature etc.
• Refractoriness is the property of a material which cannot melts or lose its shape at
prolonged high temperatures (1580oC or more). Example: fire clay is high refractory
material.
B. Mechanical Properties
Mechanical properties of the materials are find out by applying external forces on them.
The mechanical properties are,
• Strength is the capacity of a material to resist failure caused by loads acting on it. The
load may be compressive, tensile or bending. It is determined by dividing the ultimate
load taken by the material with its cross sectional area.
• Hardness is the property of a material to resist scratching by a herder body. MOHS scale
is used to determine the hardness of a materials.
• Elasticity is the capacity of a material to regain its initial shape and size after removal of
load is known as elasticity and the material is called as elastic material.
• Plasticity is when the load applied on the material will undergo permanent deformation
without cracking and retain this shape after the removal of load then it is said to be plastic
material.
• Brittleness is when the material subjected to load, fails suddenly without causing any
deformation then it is called brittle material.

Page 10 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

• Fatigue. If a material is subjected to repeated loads, then the failure occurs at some point
which is lower than the failure point caused by steady loads.
• Impact Strength. If a material is subjected to sudden loads and it will undergo some
deformation without causing rupture. It designates the toughness of material.
• Abrasion Resistance. The loss of material due to rubbing of particles while working is
called abrasion. The abrasion resistance for a material makes it durable and provided long
life.
• Creep is the deformation caused by constant loads for long periods.
C. Chemical Properties
The properties of materials against the chemical actions or chemical combinations are
termed as chemical properties. And they are,
• Chemical Resistance is the ability of a construction material to resist the effects of
chemicals like acids, salts and alkalis.
• Corrosion Resistance. Formation of rust (iron oxide) in metals, when they are subjected
to atmosphere is called as corrosion.
D. Thermal Properties

The thermal properties of a material are those that are related to the materials response
to heat. When a material is subjected to a change in temperature, it may expand, contract,
conduct, or reflect heat. Ceramics can withstand high temperatures, are good thermal
insulators, and do not expand greatly when heated.

• Thermal Capacity is the property of a material to absorb heat and it is required to design
proper ventilation. It influences the thermal stability of walls. It is expressed in J/NC and
it is calculated by the formula:
Thermal capacity, T = [H/(M(T2 – T1))]
Where H = quantity of heat required to increase the temperature from T1 to T2
T1 = Initial temperature
T2 = Final temperature
M = Mass of material in N.
• Thermal Conductivity. The amount of heat transferred through unit area of specimen
with unit thickness in unit time is termed as thermal conductivity.
• Thermal Resistivity. It is the ability to resist heat conduction. And it is the reciprocal of
thermal conductivity. When it is multiplied by thickness of material it gives thermal
resistance.
• Specific Heat is the quantity of heat required to heat 1 N of material by 1C. Specific heat
is useful when we use the material in high temperature areas.

IV. AGGREGATES

Aggregate, in building and construction, is a material used for mixing with cement,
bitumen, lime, gypsum, or other adhesive to form concrete or mortar. The aggregate gives
volume, stability, resistance to wear or erosion, and other desired physical properties to the
finished product. Commonly used aggregates include sand, crushed or broken stone, gravel
(pebbles), broken blast-furnace slag, boiler ashes (clinkers), burned shale, and burned clay.
Fine aggregate usually consists of sand, crushed stone, or crushed slag screenings; coarse
aggregate consists of gravel (pebbles), fragments of broken stone, slag, and other coarse
substances. Fine aggregate is used in making thin concrete slabs or other structural members
and where a smooth surface is desired; coarse aggregate is used for more massive members.

Page 11 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

V. PROPERTIES OF AGGREATES
1. Composition. Aggregates consisting of materials that can react with alkalis in cement and
cause excessive expansion, cracking and deterioration of concrete mix should never be
used. Therefore, it is required to test aggregates to know whether there is presence of any
such constituents in aggregate or not.
2. Size & Shape. The size and shape of the aggregate particles greatly influence the quantity
of cement required in concrete mix and hence ultimately economy of concrete.
3. Surface Texture. The development of hard bond strength between aggregate particles
and cement paste depends upon the surface texture, surface roughness and surface
porosity of the aggregate particles. If the surface is rough but porous, maximum bond
strength develops.
4. Specific Gravity. The ratio of weight of oven dried aggregates maintained for 24 hours at
a temperature of 100 to 110 C, to the weight of equal volume of water displaced by
saturated dry surface aggregate is known as specific gravity of aggregates.
5. Bulk Density. It is defined as the weight of the aggregate required to fill a container of
unit volume. It is generally expressed in kg/litre.
6. Voids. The empty spaces between the aggregate particles are known as voids. The volume
of void equals the difference between the gross volume of the aggregate mass and the
volume occupied by the particles alone.
7. Porosity & Absorption. The minute holes formed in rocks during solidification of the
molten magma, due to air bubbles, are known as pores. Rocks containing pores are called
porous rocks. Water absorption may be defined as the difference between the weight of
very dry aggregates and the weight of the saturated aggregates with surface dry
conditions.
8. Fineness Modulus. Fineness modulus is generally used to get an idea of how coarse or
fine the aggregate is. More fineness modulus value indicates that the aggregate is coarser
and small value of fineness modulus indicates that the aggregate is finer.
9. Deleterious Materials. Aggregates should not contain any harmful material in such a
quantity so as to affect the strength and durability of the concrete.
10. Crushing Value. The aggregates crushing value gives a relative measure of resistance of
an aggregate to crushing under gradually applied compressive load.
11. Impact Value. The aggregate impact value gives a relative measure of the resistance of
an aggregate to sudden shock or impact.
12. Abrasion value of aggregates. The abrasion value gives a relative measure of resistance
of an aggregate to wear when it is rotated in a cylinder along with some abrasive charge.

What is ASTM?

ASTM was originally known as the American Society of the International Association
for Testing and Materials when it was created in 1898 by Pennsylvania Railroad
engineers and scientists. Its purpose was to address and prevent the frequent rail breaks
that were plaguing the industry by developing standards that would ensure higher quality
rail products.
Today, the American Society for Testing and Materials is known as ASTM International.
It consists of over 30,000 members that include product users, producers, consumers,
academics, and consultants. ASTM is still headquartered in Pennsylvania, but it also has
offices throughout the world that are located in Belgium, Canada, China, and Mexico, as well
as one other domestic office in Washington DC.

Page 12 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

ASTM has come a long way from creating standards for steel in the railroad industry. Today,
ASTM develops and publishes technical standards for many different industries with the
goal of enhancing performance and safety over a wide range of products, materials,
systems, and services. Thousands of ASTM standards are upheld all over the world, each
with their own unique number. Each standard falls into a variety of categories which
include:

• Standard Specification
• Standard Test Method
• Standard Practice Guide
• Standard Classification
• Terminology Standard

Not only does ASTM create dependable standards, the society also offers technical
training programs, proficiency testing, and inter-laboratory crosscheck programs.
Continuing education and online training programs are available for industries and
government employees. Courses can include plastics, coal, statistics, glass, and more. Self-
guided training courses are available for QA/QC technicians who work with cement,
concrete strength training, and who conduct aggregate testing. On-site training is also
available, as are certification programs that cover a wide variety of products, materials,
systems, and services in keeping with third party compliance standards.

This is a list of ASTM International standards. Standard designations usually consist of


a letter prefix and a sequentially assigned number. This may optionally be followed by a
dash and the last two digits of the year in which the standard was adopted. Prefix letters
correspond to the following subjects:

• A = Iron and Steel Materials


• B = Nonferrous Metal Materials
• C = Ceramic, Concrete, and Masonry Materials
• D = Miscellaneous Materials
• E = Miscellaneous Subjects
• F = Materials for Specific Applications
• G = Corrosion, Deterioration, and Degradation of Materials

This list may include either current or withdrawn standards. A withdrawn standard has
been discontinued by its sponsoring committee. A standard may be withdrawn with or
without replacement.

What is AASHTO?
The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) is
a nonprofit, nonpartisan association representing highway and transportation
departments in the 50 states, the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. It represents all
transportation modes including: air, highways, public transportation, active transportation,
rail, and water. Its primary goal is to foster the development, operation, and maintenance
of an integrated national transportation system.
AASHTO works to educate the public and key decision makers about the critical role that
transportation plays in securing a good quality of life and sound economy for our nation.
AASHTO serves as a liaison between state departments of transportation and the Federal
government. AASHTO is an international leader in setting technical standards for all phases
of highway system development. Standards are issued for design, construction of highways
and bridges, materials, and many other technical areas.

AASHTO serves as a catalyst for excellence in transportation by offering:

Page 13 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

1. Smart solutions and promising practices;


2. Critical information, training and data;
3. Direct technical assistance to states; and
4. Unchallenged expertise.

AASHTO is guided by a Board of Directors made up of the chief transportation officers from
the 50 states, the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. The 12-member Executive
Committee is led by AASHTO’s elected officers, and is assisted by its executive director.
AASHTO’s policy development, standards setting, and technical activities are the product of
volunteer state department of transportation personnel who work through the AASHTO
committee structure. The committees collaborate throughout the year and typically meet
annually. These committees, which represent the highest standard of transportation
expertise in the country, address virtually every element of planning, designing,
constructing, and maintaining transportation services.

STANDARD PRACTICE FOR REDUCING SAMPLES OF AGGREGATE TO TESTING SIZE


REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM C702-87 / AASHTO T248-89

The field samples of aggregate must generally be reduced to an appropriate size for
testing to determine physical characteristics, such as, sieve analysis, soundness, hardness,
etc. The methods described in this test method are intended to minimize variations in the
aggregate characteristics between the smaller test sample and the larger field sample.
Several methods of sample reduction will be described. The technician must be sure
to use the appropriate technique dependent on such factors as aggregate size and moisture
content.
The reduction methods include:

Method A - Mechanical Splitter

Method B - Miniature Stockpile

Method C - Quartering

In some circumstances, reducing the field sample prior to testing is not


recommended. Substantial differences may unavoidably occur during sample reduction,
i.e., in the case of an aggregate having relatively few large size particles in the sample. These
few particles may be unequally distributed among the reduced size test samples. If the test
sample is being examined for certain contaminants occurring as a few discreet particles in
a small percentage, the reduced test sample may not be truly representative of the total
aggregate as produced. In these cases, the entire original field sample should be tested.

Failure to carefully follow the procedures in these methods of sample reduction


may result in providing a nonrepresentative sample for subsequent testing, resulting in
inaccurate test results, and ultimately, failure of the aggregate to perform as intended.

SUMMARY OF PROCEDURE

Aggregate and other materials sampled in the field need to be reduced to


appropriate sizes for testing. It is, therefore, necessary to reduce field samples while
minimizing the chance of variability during handling. In some instances, a few particles on
a given sieve might affect a gradation significantly enough to alter an interpretation of the
field sample and subsequently the entire material's compliance with specifications.

Page 14 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

The appropriate field sample reduction method is dependent chiefly on the nominal
maximum size of the aggregate, the amount of free moisture in the sample, and the
equipment available.
The following chart should be used in selecting the appropriate reduction method
for the aggregate to be tested.

METHOD A -- MECHANICAL SPLITTER

Apparatus

Mechanical Splitter - The mechanical sample splitter shall have an even number of
equal width chutes, not less than eight for coarse or combined aggregate, or twelve for fine
aggregate. The chutes shall discharge alternately to each side of the splitter. For coarse and
combined aggregates, the width of the individual chutes shall be approximately twice the
largest size particle in the sample to be reduced. For dry fine aggregate in which the entire
sample will pass the 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) sieve, the minimum width of the chutes shall be at
least fifty percent larger than the largest particles in the sample with a maximum width of
3/4 in. (20 mm).
The splitter shall be equipped with at least two receptacles (catch pans) to hold the
two halves of the sample during splitting. It shall also be equipped with a hopper or
straight-edge pan with a width equal to or slightly less than the overall width of the
assembly of chutes, by which the sample may be fed at a controlled rate into the chutes.
The splitter and accessories shall be designed to allow the sample to flow smoothly
without restriction or loss of material.
Mechanical splitters are commonly available in sizes adequate for aggregate having
the largest particle size not over 1 1/2 in. (37.5 mm).

Procedure

1. Place the original sample, or portion thereof, in the hopper or pan and uniformly
distribute it from edge to edge being sure the sample appears homogenous (well-
blended). Carefully introduce the sample into the chutes in a manner to allow the
aggregate to flow freely through the openings and into the catch pans. Continue this
procedure until the entire sample has been halved, being careful that catch pans do not
overflow.
2. Remove the catch pans and set aside. Continue splitting one half of the material. Follow
this procedure, being sure to split entire increments, until the desired test sample size is
obtained. Retain the unused material until all desired tests are performed in case a retest
is needed.

Page 15 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Note: Sometimes a significant amount of fines may be lost in the splitting process if the sample is
extremely dry and the action of pouring the sample through the splitter chutes creates a
large dust cloud, suspending the fines in the air above the splitter. If this is a serious
concern, then add a small amount of water to the original sample and mix thoroughly before
splitting the sample. The extra moisture will prevent many of the fines from becoming
suspended in the air and drifting off. Remember to not add so much water that the moisture
content ends up being at or greater than the SSD condition, in which case the mechanical
splitting method would no longer be valid. In any case, be sure to perform the splitting
procedure in a well-ventilated area while wearing a suitable dust mask.

METHOD B -- MINIATURE STOCKPILE

Apparatus

Straight-edge scoop Shovel or trowel (for mixing the aggregate)


Small sampling thief, small scoop, or spoon

Procedure

This method is for damp, fine aggregate only.

1. Place the field sample on a hard, clean, level surface where there will be no loss of material
or contamination. Mix the sample by turning the entire sample over three times with a
shovel. With the last turning, shovel the entire sample into a conical pile by depositing
each shovelful on top of the preceding one.
2. Obtain a sample for each test to be performed by selecting at least five increments of
material at random locations from the miniature stockpile using a sample thief, small
scoop, or spoon.

METHOD C -- QUARTERING

Apparatus

Straight-edged scoop Flat-edged shovel or trowel


Broom or brush
Alternate method only - canvas blanket measuring approximately 6 ft. x 8 ft (2 m by 2.5 m).

Procedure

1. Place the original sample on a hard, clean, level surface. Mix the material thoroughly by
turning the entire sample over with the shovel at least three times. With the last turning,
shovel the entire sample into a conical pile by depositing each shovelful on top of the
preceding one. Carefully flatten the conical pile to a uniform thickness and diameter by
pressing down the apex with the shovel so that each quarter section of the resulting pile
will contain the material originally in the pile. The pile diameter should be approximately
four to eight times the thickness.
2. Divide the flattened pile into four equal quarters with the shovel or trowel. Remove two
diagonally opposite quarters, including all fine material. Brush the cleared spaces clean.
Successively mix and quarter the remaining material in the same fashion as the original
sample. Continue this process until the desired quantity is obtained.

Save the unused portion of the original field sample until all testing is completed in
case a retest is needed.

Page 16 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

METHOD C -- ALTERNATIVE

As an alternative to Method B, when the floor surface is uneven, the field sample
may be placed on a canvas blanket and mixed with a shovel, or by alternatively lifting each
corner of the blanket and pulling the blanket over the sample toward the diagonally
opposite corner causing the material to be rolled. Flatten and divide the pile as described
in Method B, or if the surface beneath the blanket is too uneven, insert a stick or pipe
dividing the pile into two equal parts.
Remove the stick leaving a fold in the canvas between the sample halves. Slide the
stick under the canvas blanket again at a right angle to the first division and dissecting the
two halves of the sample through their centers. Lift the stick evenly from both ends dividing
the sample into equal quarters. Remove two diagonal parts including the fine material and
clean the area. Successively mix and quarter the remaining material until the desired
sample size is obtained.

Note: The quartering method is fairly time intensive and thus is generally used in situations
where an adequate mechanical splitter is unavailable. Diligence and care is required to
ensure that the samples obtained by quartering remain representative of the entire field
sample.

STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR TOTAL EVAPORABLE MOISTURE CONTENT OF AGGREGATE


BY DRYING
REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM C566-96 / AASHTO T255-92

The moisture content in aggregate is used to determine the binder content for HMA
during production of the mixture in a plant. The procedure requires that a known amount of
aggregate be obtained, the aggregate heated to remove the moisture, and the percentage of
moisture determined. Ovens, hot plates, heat lamps or microwave ovens are used for heating the
sample.
Apparatus

Balance sensitive to 1.0 gram

Source of Heat (oven, electric or gas hot plate, electric heat lamps, or microwave oven)
Sample Container, suitable for method of heating

Procedure
1. Weigh the sample and record the weight
2. Dry the sample until there is less than 0.1% change in weight over subsequent weighings.
3. Record the weight of the sample after the sample has cooled sufficiently not to damage
the balance.

Sample Problem:
Given the following information, determine the percent of moisture content in the Sand and No.
57.
Given:

Page 17 of 208
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Sand

Weight of wet sample = 585 grams


Weight of dry sample = 540 grams

No. 57
Weight of wet sample = 1205 grams

Weight of dry sample = 1190 grams


Absorption

Sand = 0.5%

No. 57 = 0.9%
𝑊𝑡. 𝑜𝑓 𝑊𝑒𝑡 − 𝑊𝑡. 𝑜𝑓 𝐷𝑟𝑦
𝑀𝑜𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑡 = × 100 − %𝐴𝑏𝑠.
𝑊𝑡. 𝑜𝑓 𝑑𝑟𝑦

Solution:

Sand
585−540
𝑀𝑜𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑡 = [( ) × 100] − 0.5% = 7.8%
540

No. 57
1205 − 1190
𝑀𝑜𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑡 = [( ) × 100] − 0.9 = 0.4%
1190

SIEVE ANALYSIS OF AGGREGATES


REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM C 136-84a, AASHTO T27-93,
ASTM C33 / C33M-18, AASHTO T-27

Sieve analysis which is also known as gradation test is a laboratory test procedure that is an effective
way of analyzing or determining the particle size distribution of coarse aggregates within a given sample. The
process separates fine particles from coarser particles by passing the material through a number of sieves of
different mesh sizes. Particle size distribution is defined using the mass and volume. Particle size determinations
on large samples of aggregate are necessary to ensure that aggregates perform as intended for their specified
use. Particle size distribution can affect a wide range of properties such as the strength of concrete, solubility of
a mixture, surface area properties, and even their taste. This information can then be used to determine
compliance with design and production requirements. Data can also be used to better understand the
relationship between aggregates or blends and to predict trends during production. In this method, the soil is
sieved through a set of sieves. A known mass of material is placed on top of a group of nested sieves (arranged in
order of decreasing size from top to bottom) and mechanically shaken for a designated period of time. Particles
move horizontally or vertically through sieve mesh.

Sieves are wire screen having square openings. Size of these openings gives the sieves their name which
is called sieve number. A sieve with a mesh opening of 4.75 mm is designated as 4.75 mm Sieve (Sieve number
written on sieve). Similarly, a 600-micron sieve refers to a sieve which has a mesh opening of 0.600 mm. The two
Page 18 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

major standards governing test sieves and appropriate sizes are ASTM E11 and ISO 565/3310-1, both of which
specify parameters for aperture dimensions, mesh size, and statistical variations. Opening sizes and mesh
diameters for test sieves are often duplicated between these two standards, making it easier to select the proper
sieve size for your material. Sieve mesh opening sizes range from 5in (125mm) down to #635 (20µm).
There are two methods in sieving analysis, the Manual Sieving Method and the Mechanical Sieving
Method. Manual sieving method is carried out in places where there is no electricity and mainly used in, onsite
differentiation among large and small particles. Mechanical sieving method is used in laboratories to assure
the quality and this is the widely used method in present days. In mechanical sieving the method can be classified
into two further groups depending on their sieving movement as horizontal movement sieving method and
vertical movement sieving method. The vertical movement sieving method is also known as throw-action
sieving and vibratory sieving methods.
There are two ways or methods in weighing the material retained on each of the sieves, the Dry Sieve
Analysis and Wet Sieve Analysis. Dry sieve analysis is considered mostly and here the testing particles
(specimen) are in dry state. Wet sieve analysis is carried out after the dry sieve analysis. The purpose of the wet
sieve analysis is to remove all the particles which are finer than 75 microns (of the last sieve) particles from the
sample so that we arrive at the correct sieve analysis results.
In performing sieve test one must consider and know the two categories of coarse grains soils. The
portion of soil, which contains particle size bigger than 4.75 mm is retained on the sieve. This portion is called
gravel fraction. Gravels, having grain size greater than 4.75 mm. The portion of soil, which contains particle size
less than 4.75 mm passed through the sieve. This portion is called sand fraction. Sand, having grain size smaller
than 4.75 mm. For gravel fractions we require sieves of sizes 80 mm, 40 mm, 20 mm, 10 mm and 4.75 mm. This
set is called set of coarse sieves as it sieves coarser part of the coarse soils. Second set of sieves for sand fractions
consists sieves of sizes 2 mm, 1 mm, 600 µ, 425 µ, 212 µ, 150 µ and 75 µ. If we didn’t mention, then 1 mm that is
millimeter is equal to 1000 micrometer which we denote as letter micron. So 1 mm is equal to 1000 micron. So
here 600 microns is actually 0.6 mm. This set of sieves is called set of fine sieves as it sieves finer part of the
coarse soils.
A test procedure for an effective determination of the particle size distribution of coarse aggregates. First,
find a sample that ensure that aggregates perform as intended for their specified used. Make sure that sample is
clean and no foreign materials, such as, feces etc. Then, collect the chosen sample. After that, transport it to the
testing laboratory. When it arrived in the testing center, prepare it for testing. Lastly, test and record the result.

Part of testing is weighing the material. There are two methods of weighing the sample. First is the
Cumulative Method where each sieve fraction, beginning with the coarsest, is placed in a previously tared pan
and weighed. This process is repeated until all fractions and the bottom pan have been added and weighed. This
is a good time saving option since you don’t have to empty out or tare the pan on the scale. Second one is the
Fractional Method where operator weighs the contents of each sieve fraction separately, waiting to discard
material until the entire test is complete. The technician then calculates the amount retained and passing the
sieve to the nearest 0.1% by total mass.

In Cumulative Method, as each retained fraction is added, divide the cumulative mass by the total mass
of the sample and multiply by 100 to calculate percent retained. Subtract the cumulative percent retained on a
given sieve from 100 to calculate percent passing.

(Cumulative Mass / Total Mass) × 100 = Cumulative % Retained


100 – (Cummulative % Retained) = Cumulative Retained Passing

Page 19 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

On the other hand, Fractional Method, divide the mass retained on each sieve by the total and multiply
by 100 to calculate percent retained. Calculate percent passing by subtracting the percent retained on the sieve
nested beneath.
[Fractional Mass (on each sieves) ÷ Total Mass] × 100 = (% Fractional Retained)

(% Fractional Retained) – (% Retained on the sieve below) = (% Fractional Passing)


In calculating the percentage of amount of soil retained on each sieve as weight of retained soil on the
sieve divided by total weight of soil sample multiplied by 100. This way we know what percentage of the total
weight is retained on a particular sieve. Percentage weight retained on the 1st sieves is w1 divided by W multiply
by 100.

For calculation purposes and to determine some important characteristics, we also calculate two values.
First one is cumulative percentage retained. Now cumulative percentage retained of any sieve is percentage
weight retained on that sieve plus all percentage weight retained on all the sieves above it. Cumulative percentage
retained is the total percentage amount of soil which could not pass the particular sieve. In other words, this
percent amount of soil has grain size greater than the sieve number.
Second value we calculate is percentage finer, using which we plot a graph called particle size
distribution curve. Percentage finer, as name suggests, is the percentage amount of soil which is finer, than a
particular sieve.

Testing tips:

❖ Avoid overloading sieves.


❖ Allow enough time on a sieve shaker or testing screen for complete separation.
❖ Watch for degradation.
❖ Consider reducing shaker time intervals or using a different method.
❖ Check sieves for wear, torn mesh or distorted openings regularly.
❖ Do not use tools or probes to dislodge trapped particles.
❖ Take care when transferring material to the tare weighing pan.
❖ Don’t forget to pre-dry the sample.
Sample Problem: From the results of a sieve analysis, shown below, determine:

a. The percent finer than each sieve and plot a grain size distribution curve.
b. D10, D30, D60 from the grain-size distribution curve.
c. The uniformity coefficient, Cu. and
d. The coefficient of gradation, Cc.
Table 1

Sieve Number Mass of soil retained on each sieve (g)


4 0
10 40
20 60
40 89
Page 20 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

60 140
80 122
100 210
200 56
Pan 12

Solution:

a.

Mass of Soil Cumulative percent


Sieve Percent retained of Percent finer
retained on retained on each sieve
Number each sieve (%) (%)
each sieve (g) (%)
4 0 0 0 100
10 40 5.49 5.49 94.51
20 60 8.23 13.72 86.28
40 89 12.21 25.93 74.07
60 140 19.20 45.13 54.87
80 122 16.74 61.87 38.13
100 210 28.81 90.68 9.32
200 56 7.68 98.36 1.64
Pan 12 1.64 100 0
729
Percent Retained = (Mass of Soil Retained/Total Mass of Soil)

No. 4 Sieve No. 80 Sieve


0 122
% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = × 100% % 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = × 100%
729 729

% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = 0% % 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = 16.74%

No. 10 Sieve No. 100 Sieve


40 210
% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = × 100% % 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = × 100%
729 729

% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = 5.49% % 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = 28.81%


No. 20 Sieve No. 200 Sieve
60 210
% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = × 100% % 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = × 100%
729 729

% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = 8.23% % 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = 7.67%


No. 40 Sieve Pan
89 12
% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = × 100% % 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = × 100%
729 729

% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = 12.21% % 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = 1.65%


No. 60 Sieve
140
% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = × 100%
729

% 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 = 19.20%
Page 21 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Distribution Curve

b. D10, D30, D60 from the grain-size distribution curve.

c. The uniformity coefficient, Cu

D10 = 0.15mm D30 = 0.17mm D60 = 0.28mm


𝐷60 0.28𝑚𝑚
𝐶𝑢 = = = 1.9
𝐷10 0.15𝑚𝑚
d. The coefficient of gradation, Cc

𝐷30 2 (0.17𝑚𝑚)2
𝐶𝑐 = = = 0.69
𝐷10 𝑥 𝐷60 0.28𝑚𝑚 𝑥 0.15𝑚𝑚

Page 22 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Determination of Unit Weight of Aggregates

There are two standard test methods in the determination for unit mass (weight) of an aggregate, the
Loose Method and the Rodded Method, using ASTM C29.

Procedure using Loose Method:

• Determine the weight of the empty bucket.


• Fill the bucket to overflowing by means of shovel or scoop. Exercise care to prevent segregation
of the particle size of the sample.
• Level the surface of the aggregate using straightedge.
• Clean the outside of the bucket and remove excess dust and particles.
• Determine the mass of the bucket with aggregates, and record the data.

Procedure using Rodded Method:

• Fill the bucket one-third full.


• Rod the layer of aggregate with 25 strokes of the tamping rod evenly distributed over the surface.
• Fill the bucket two-thirds full again and rod 25 times.
• Fill the bucket to over flowing and rod again for 25 times.
• After rodding, level the surface with a straightedge.
• Clean the surface of the bucket and remove excess materials.
• Determine the weight of the bucket with aggregates and record data.

After using either of the two methods, unit weights are then calculated with the formula as follows:

SPECIFIC GRAVITY & ABSORPTION DETERMINATION OF FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES

REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM C127-88, AASHTO T85-91

Specific Gravity is the ratio of the weight of a given volume of aggregate to the weight of an equal volume of
water.

Absorption is a measure of the amount of water that an aggregate can absorb into its pore structure and
is determined by the same test procedure.

Aggregate is a granular material, such as sand, gravel, crushed stone, crushed hydraulic-cement concrete, or iron
blast-furnace slag, used with a hydraulic cementing medium to produce either concrete or mortar.

There are two types of aggregates:

• Fine Aggregates – are particles entirely passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, and predominantly retained
on the 75 µm sieves.
• Coarse Aggregates– are aggregates that will not pass through a sieve with 4.75 mm openings.

Page 23 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

I. Specific Gravity Determination of Aggregates

For fine aggregates, the specific gravity may be expressed as bulk oven dry (OD), bulk saturated surface
dry (SSD), or apparent specific gravity (A). Let us first define the terms:

A. Bulk Dry Specific Gravity – It is used to determine the specific gravity of a compacted aggregate by
determining the ratio of its weight to the weight of an equal volume of water.
In this test, the aggregates have to be:

• Dry (no water in sample).


• Saturated surface dry (SSD, water fills the HMA air voids).
• Submerged in water (underwater).
B. Bulk Saturated Surface Dry Specific Gravity (SSD) – The ratio of the weight in air of a unit volume of
aggregate, including the weight of water within the voids filled to the extent achieved by submerging in
water for approximately 15-19 hours, to the weight in air of an equal volume of gas-free distilled water
at a stated temperature.
SSD (Saturated, Surface Dry) – This is a condition in which the aggregate has been soaked in water and
has absorbed water into its pore spaces. The excess, free surface moisture removed so that the particles
are still saturated, but the surface of the particle is essentially dry.

C. Apparent Specific Gravity (Gsa) – It is the ratio of the weight in air of a unit volume of the impermeable
portion of aggregate (does not include the permeable pores in aggregate) to the weight in air of an equal
volume of gas-free distilled water at the stated temperature.
D. Absorption (% Abs) – The increase in weight of aggregate due to water in the pores of the material, but
not including water adhering to the outside surface of the particles.

Specific Gravity Determination of Coarse Aggregates

Perform calculations and determine values using the appropriate formula below. In these formulas, A = oven
dry mass, B = SSD mass, and C = weight of SSD in water.

A. Bulk Oven Dry Specific Gravity (OD)

Page 24 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

B. Bulk Saturated Surface Dry Specific Gravity (SSD)

C. Apparent Specific Gravity

D. Absorption (% A)

Materials needed (Coarse Aggregates)

• Water Tank
• Cloth
• Coarse Aggregates
• Tray
• Wire Basket
• Balance scale

Procedures for Coarse Aggregates:

1. Dry the test sample to constant mass at a temperature of 110 ±5°C (230 ±9°F) and cool in air at room
temperature for 1 to 3 hours.

2. Immerse the aggregate in water at room temperature for a period of 15 to 19 hours.

3. Place the empty basket into the water bath and attach to the balance. Inspect the immersion tank to ensure the
water level is at the overflow outlet height. Tare the balance (set to 0) with the empty basket attached in the
water bath.
4. Remove the test sample from the water and roll it in a large absorbent cloth until all visible films of water are
removed. Wipe the larger particles individually.

5. Determine the SSD mass of the sample, and record this and all subsequent masses to the nearest 0.1 g or 0.1
percent of the sample mass, whichever is greater. Designate this mass as “B”.

Page 25 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

6. Re-inspect the immersion tank to insure the water level is at the overflow outlet height. Immediately place the
SSD test sample in the sample container and weigh it in water maintained at 23.0 ±1.7°C (73.4 ±3°F). Shake the
container to release entrapped air before recording the weight. Designate this submerged weight as “C”.

7. Remove the sample from the basket. Ensure all material have been removed. Place in a container of known
mass.

8. Dry the test sample to constant mass and cool in air at room temperature for 1 to 3 hours. Designate this mass
as “A”.

II. Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregates

Perform calculations and determine values using the appropriate formula below. In these formulas, where:
A = Oven dry weight, B = SSD weight, C = Weight of SSD in water.

A. Bulk Dry Specific Gravity

B. Bulk Saturated Surface Dry Specific Gravity (SSD)

C. Apparent Specific Gravity

D. Absorption (% A)

Materials needed (Fine Aggregates):

• Pycnometer
• Oven (Soil Testing)
• Distilled Water
• Tray
• Balance scale
• Fine aggregates

Page 26 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Procedure for Fine Aggregates:

1. Thoroughly mix the sample and reduce the sample if required. The sample size for this procedure is
approximately 1000g of material passing the 4.75 mm sieve (mesh strainer).
2. Dry test samples to constant weight in an oven set at 230 ± 9°F (110 ± 5°C). Cool the sample at room
temperature for 1 to 3 hours. After the cooling period, immerse the sand in water at room temperature for a
period of 15 to 19 hours. This is the recommended procedure to eliminate the need to pour excess water from
the sand prior to testing. The decantation process is time consuming and difficult, since great care must be taken
to avoid pouring some of the sample along with the water.
3. Pour water from sample, avoiding loss of fines. Spread the sample on a flat, non-absorbent surface or tray. Stir
the sample occasionally to assist in homogeneous drying. A current of warm air may be used to assist drying
procedures; however, fine particles may be lost with this procedure if not careful.

4. Determine the SSD condition of the sand using the Cone Test. Throughout the process of drying in Step 3, test
the sand for SSD condition using the cone method. Place the cone with the large diameter down on a glass plate.
Fill cone to overflowing with drying sand. Lightly tamp the fine aggregate into the mold with 25 light drops of the
tamper. Each drop should start about 1/5 in. above the top surface of the fine aggregate. Remove loose sand from
base and carefully lift the mold vertically. If surface moisture is still present, the fine aggregate will retain the
molded shape. When the sand achieves an SSD condition, the sand will slump.
5. Calibrate a specific gravity flask pycnometer by filling with water at 73.4 ± 3°F (23 ± 1.7°C) to the calibration
line. Record this weight as the weight of the pycnometer filled with water to the nearest 0.1g.

6. Place the SSD sand into the pycnometer and fill with water (set at 73.4 ± 3°F (23 ± 1.7°C)) to 90% of pycnometer
capacity.

7. Bring the pycnometer to the pycnometer-calibrated capacity with additional water. If bubbles prevent the
proper filling of the pycnometer, adding a few drops of isopropyl alcohol is recommended to disperse the foam.
Place the pycnometer in a water bath at the regulated temperature and allow the sample to equalize.

8. Determine the total weight of pycnometer, specimen, and water. Record the weight to the nearest 0.1g as
weight of pycnometer with sample and water.
Additional:

The common errors during testing:

• Getting the aggregate SSD - neither wetter nor drier.


• Balance calibration errors.
• Ensuring that the change in height of the water when the sample is submerged is compensated for.
• Not allowing the sample to become fully saturated before testing for SSD and Immersed mass.
• Full drying to constant mass.
• Over-drying sensitive materials (driving off water that is actually part of the sample) either by poor
temperature control, or the characteristics of the aggregate.
• Water temperature effects (its density).
• Purity of the water.
• Not allowing sufficient time for the balance to stabilize its reading.
• Removal of air bubbles when weighing under water.
• Loss of particles, due to poor technique (carelessness), insufficient washing at the beginning, friable
particles.
• Having a sample where particles are less dense than water. Some or all thereof.

Page 27 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Problem : Determine calculations based on appropriate formula.

A = Weight of oven dry sample


B = Weight of Pycnometer with water only

S = Weight of Saturated Surface Dry of sample


C = Weight of Pycnometer with sample and water

Bulk Specific Gravity (Gsb) Gsb = A / (B + S – C)


Bulk SSD Specific Gravity (Gsb SSD) Gsb SSD = S / (B + A – C)

Apparent Specific Gravity (Gsa) Gsa = A / (A + B – C)

Absorption (% Abs) % Abs = [(S – A) / A] x 100

Trial A B S C B+S-C B+A-C S-A


1 497.1 670.7 500.05 938.2 232.55 229.6 2.95
2 496.7 679.6 499.77 938.2 241.17 238.1 3.07
3 496.5 671.6 499.61 938.2 233.01 229.9 3.11

Gsb SSD, S / Gsb, A / (B + Gsa, A / (B + % Abs., [(S – A)


Trial
(B + S – C) S – C) A – C) / A] x 100
1 2.15 2.14 2.17 0.59
2 2.07 2.06 2.09 0.62
3 2.14 2.13 2.16 0.63

STANDARD METHOF OF TEST FOR BULK DENSITY (“Unit Weight”) AND VOIDS IN AGGREGATE (UNIT
WEIGHT DETERMINATION)
REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM C29/29M-91a; AASHTO 19/19M-93

I. OBJECTIVES
1. To determine the unit weight of an air-dry mixed aggregate
2. To visualize how some certain aggregate properties influence the voids in aggregates
3. To learn the importance of the capacity of the measure required for a given aggregate size for testing
II. SCOPE
This test method covers the determination of bulk density (“unit weight”) of aggregate in a compacted
or loose condition, and calculated voids between particles in fine, coarse, or mixed aggregates based on the same
determination.
This test method is applicable to aggregates not exceeding 125 mm (5 in.) in nominal maximum size.

Page 28 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

Unit weight is the traditional terminology used to describe the property determined by this test method, which
is weight per unit volume (more correctly, mass per unit volume or density).
γ=M/V
γ = Unit Weight
M = Mass
V = Volume
III. TERMINOLOGY
▪ BULK DENSITY - the mass of a unit volume of bulk aggregate material, in which the volume includes the
volume of the individual particles and the volume of the voids between the particles. Expressed in
kg/m3(lb/ft3)

▪ UNIT WEIGHT (mass) per unit volume

▪ WEIGHT - force exerted on a body by gravity


▪ VOIDS - the space between particles in an aggregate mass not occupied by solid mineral matter.

IV. SIGNIFICANCE AND USE


• This test method is often used to determine bulk density values that are necessary for use for many
methods of selecting proportions for concrete mixtures.
• The bulk density also may be used for determining mass/volume relationships for conversions in
purchase agreements. However, the relationship between degree of compaction of aggregates in a hauling
unit or stockpile and that achieved in this method is unknown.

V. APPARATUS/MATERIALS

1. WEIGHING BALANCE
The balance shall have sufficient capacity, be readable to 0.1 percent of the sample mass, or better,
and conform to the requirements of M 231.

Page 29 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

2. TAMPING ROD
A round, straight steel rod, 16 mm ( 5/8 in.) in diameter and approximately 600 mm (24 in.) in
length, having one end rounded to a hemispherical tip of the same diameter as the rod.

3. CYLINDRICAL METAL MEASURE


It shall be watertight, with the top and bottom true and even, and sufficiently rigid to retain its
form under rough usage. The measure should have a height approximately equal to the diameter,
but in no case shall the height be less than 80 percent nor more than 150 percent of the diameter.

4. SHOVEL OR SCOOP
of convenient size for filling the measure with aggregate.

5. CALIBRATION EQUIPTMENT
A supply of water pump or chassis grease that can be placed on the rim of the container to prevent
leakage.

VI. PROCEDURE
A. CALIBRATION OF THE MEASURE
1. Select an appropriate measure according to the nominal size of the aggregate sample.
2. Weigh the empty measure.
3. Fill the measure with water at room temperature and cover with a glass plate to exclude air bubbles
and to remove excess water.
4. Weigh the measure filled with water. Make the necessary calculations to determine the mass of the
water that filled the entire volume of the measure. The actual volume of the measure shall be atleast 95%
of the nominal volume in the table
5. Take the temperature reading of the water used to fill the measure and determine its density using
Table 2. interpolate as necessary.
6. Compute the volume of the measure by dividing the mass of the water required to fill the measure by
its density.
7. If there is a reason to question the accuracy of the measure, recalibrate or replace the water as needed.
Page 30 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

B. UNIT WEIGHT DETERMINATION


1. Select a sample of oven-dry mixed aggregate approximately 125% to 200% of the volume of the
measure.
For aggregates <37.5 mm, use the rodding procedure
For aggregates >37.5 mm but <150 mm, use the jigging procedure
2. Fill the measure one-third full. Level and apply 25 strokes tamping evenly over the surface.
3. Fill the measure two-thirds ful. Level and tamp as in step 2. Only enough force should be used to cause
the tamping rod to just penetrate the last layer of aggregate placed in the measure.
4. Fill to overflowing, tamp as before and strike off the surplus by rolling the tamping rod over the surface
or level off using a straight edge. Do not compress the aggregates.
5. Determine the net weight of the aggregate in the measure and compute the unit weight. Make at least
two trials. Result should agree within one percent.

VII. DATA ANALYSIS


1. DENSITY
M = (MT – Mm) / V
where:
P = unit weight of the aggregate (kg/m^3)
MT = combined mass of the aggregate and he
measure (kg)
Mm = mass f the measure (kg)
V = volume of the measure (m^3)
2. UNIT WEIGHT
γ = (WT – Wm) / V

Page 31 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, B&E Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082) 296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 133

where:
γ = unit weight of aggregate (kN/m^3)
WT = total weight of aggregate and measure (kN)
Wm = weight of measure (kN)
V = volume of measure (m^3)
3. VOID CONTENT
% Voids = { [GS(dry) x pW – pagg] / GS(dry)(pW) } x100
where:
pagg = density of aggregate (kN/m^3)
pW = density of water (kg/m^3)
GS(dry) = bulk of specific gravity on the dry
basis
Problem: The following table shows the result of bulk density (unit weight) and voids in Aggregate test. Calculate
the Bulk Density and % of voids.

Wt. of the Wt. of the


Volume of Wt. of the
Sample Measure + Measure + Bulk
the Measure, Measure, % Void
No. Sample, Sampele + Density
V. (cm3) W1, gm
W2, gm Water, W3, gm
1 3000 2686 6878 7953
2 3000 2686 6752 7662
3 3000 2686 6793 7846
Computation:
Sample No. 1
6878 − 2686
𝑀=
3000
𝑀 = 1.397 𝑔𝑚/𝑐𝑚3
7953 − 6878
% 𝑉𝑜𝑖𝑑𝑠 = × 100
3000
% 𝑉𝑜𝑖𝑑𝑠 = 35.83%

Sample No. 2
6752 − 2686
𝑀=
3000
𝑀 = 1.355 𝑔𝑚/𝑐𝑚3
7662 − 6752
% 𝑉𝑜𝑖𝑑𝑠 = × 100
3000
% 𝑉𝑜𝑖𝑑𝑠 = 30.33%
Page 32 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Sample No. 3
6793 − 2686
𝑀=
3000
𝑀 = 1.369 𝑔𝑚/𝑐𝑚3
7846 − 6793
% 𝑉𝑜𝑖𝑑𝑠 = × 100
3000
% 𝑉𝑜𝑖𝑑𝑠 = 35.1%

Wt. of the Wt. of the


Volume of Wt. of the
Sample Measure + Measure + Bulk
the Measure, Measure, % Void
No. Sample, Sampele + Density
V. (cm3) W1, gm
W2, gm Water, W3, gm
1 3000 2686 6878 7953 1.397 35.83
2 3000 2686 6752 7662 1.355 30.33
3 3000 2686 6793 7846 1.369 35.10
Average 1.374 33.75

DETERMINATION OF MOISTURE CONTENT OF COARSE AND FINE AGGREGATES


REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM C566-96; AASHTO T255-92

I. OBJECTIVES
1. To learn the procedures for determining the amount of moisture in aggregates.
2. To quantify the components of evaporable moisture in aggregates
3. To calculate and compare the total evaporable moisture with surface moisture

CHARACTERISTICS CONTROLLED BY POROSITY


1. DENSITY
2. ABSORPTION AND SURFACE MOISTURE
3. SOUNDNESS
➢ ABSORPTION AND SURFACE MOISTURE
Moisture Conditions of Aggregates
1. Damp or Wet
2. Air Dry
3. Saturated-surface Dry
Page 33 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

4. Oven Dry

II. TERMINOLOGY
• MOISTURE CONTENT – quantity of water contained in a material
• AGGREGATE – a material or structure formed from a loosely compacted mass of fragment
• VOIDS – spaces or gaps inside a material
• ABSORPTION – action by which a material absorbs or is absorbed by another
• SURFACE MOISTURE (FREE MOISTURE) – absorbed water and moisture coating the surface
III. APPARATUS/MATERIALS
• COARSE AGGREGATE SAMPLE
• OVEN
• SAMPLE CONTAINER
• BALANCE SENSITIVE TO 1.0 GRAM
• SIEVE

IV. PROCEDURES
A. TOTAL MOISTURE CONTENT OF COARSE AGGREGATES
1. Obtain the prescribed test sample size
2. Weigh the sample to the nearest 1.0 gram. Due this quickly to avoid moisture loss.
3. Under controlled temperature, dry the sample in an oven. The sample is completely dry when further
drying would cause less than 0.1 percent additional loss in weight.
4. Weigh the dry sample to the nearest 1.0 gram.

B. FREE MOISTURE CONTENT OF COARSE AGGREGATE IN THE SSD CONDITION


1. Obtain the prescribed test sample size.
2. Soak the sample for 24 hours.
3. Weigh the wet sample to the nearest 1.0 gram. Avoid moisture loss.
4. Using a towel, wipe the surface dry until it loses its shine.
5. Immediately weigh the SSD sample to the nearest 1.0 gram.

Page 34 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

V. DATA ANALYSIS
1. Total Moisture Content
MC [(MT – MO) : MO] x 100%
2. Absorption
A [(MSSD – MO) : MO] x 100%

VI. EXAMPLE
The original weight of the sample is 546.2 grams and the dry weight of the sample is 541.2 grams. Find the
moisture content to the nearest 1.0 grams.

DETERMINATION OF FINENESS MODULUS

Fineness Modulus of Sand


Fineness modulus of sand (fine aggregate and coarse aggregate) is an index number which represents
the mean size of the particles in sand. It is calculated by performing sieve analysis with standard sieves.
The cumulative percentage retained on each sieve is added and divided by 100 gives the value of fineness
modulus.

Fine aggregate means the aggregate which passes through 4.75mm sieve. To find the fineness modulus
of fine aggregate we need sieve sizes of 4.75mm, 2.36mm, 1.18mm, 0.6mm, 0.3mm and 0.15mm. Fineness
modulus of finer aggregate is lower than fineness modulus of coarse aggregate. On the other hand, coarse
aggregate means the aggregate which is retained on 4.75mm sieve when it is sieved through 4.75mm. So,
in the calculation of coarse aggregate we need all sizes of sieves. To find fineness modulus of coarse
aggregate we need sieve sizes of 80mm, 40mm, 20mm, 10mm, 4.75mm, 2.36mm, 1.18mm, 0.6mm, 0.3mm
and 0.15mm.

Determination of Fineness Modulus of Sand

Page 35 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

To determine the fineness modulus, we need standard sieves, mechanical sieve shaker (optional), dry
oven and digital weight scale.
A. Sample preparation - Take a sample of fine or coarse aggregate in pan and placed it in dry oven at a
temperature of 100 – 110oC. After drying take the sample and note down its weight.

B. Test Procedure

1. Take the sieves and arrange them in descending order with the largest sieve on top.

It is suggested that, to know the exact value of fineness modulus for coarse aggregate,
mechanical shaker will give better value than hand shaking because of more number of
sieves and heavy size particles.

2. If mechanical shaker is used, pour the sample in the top sieve and then close it with sieve
plate. Then switch on the machine and shaking of sieves should be done at least 5
minutes.

If shaking is done by the hands then pour the sample in the top sieve and close it then
hold the top two sieves and shake it inwards and outwards, vertically and horizontally.
After some time shake the 3rd and 4th sieves and finally last sieves.

3. After sieving, record the sample weights retained on each sieve. Then find the cumulative
weight retained. Finally determine the cumulative percentage retained on each sieves.
Add all the cumulative percentage values and divide with 100 then we will get the value
of fineness modulus.

Calculation of Fineness Modulus of Sand – Fine Aggregate


Dry weight of sample = 1000g

After sieve analysis the values appeared are tabulated below.

Page 36 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Therefore, fineness modulus of aggregate = (cumulative % retained) / 100 = (275/100) = 2.75


Fineness modulus of fine aggregate is 2.75. It means the average value of aggregate is in between the 2nd
sieve and 3rd sieve. It means the average aggregate size is in between 0.3mm to 0.6mm as shown in below
figure.

Values of Fineness Modulus of Sand:

Fineness modulus of fine aggregate varies from 2.0 to 3.5. Fine aggregate having fineness modulus more
than 3.2 should not considered as fine aggregate. Various values of fineness modulus for different sands
are detailed below.

Calculation of Fineness Modulus of Sand – Coarse Aggregate


Dry weight of sample = 5000g

After sieve analysis the values appeared are tabulated below.

Page 37 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Therefore, fineness modulus of coarse aggregates = sum (cumulative % retained) / 100 = (717/100) =
7.17
Fineness modulus of 7.17 means, the average size of particle of given coarse aggregate sample is in
between 7th and 8th sieves, that is between 10mm to 20mm.

Limits of Fineness Modulus:


Fineness modulus of coarse aggregate varies from 6.5 to 8.0. And for all in aggregates or combined
aggregates fineness modulus varies from 3.5 to 6.5. Range of fineness modulus for aggregate of different
maximum sized aggregates is given below.

Page 38 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

SOUNDNESS TEST

The soundness test determines the resistance of an aggregate to disintegration by weathering (the
breakdown of rocks at the Earth’s surface) and freeze-thaw cycles (the freezing and thawing of water inside the
aggregate). Aggregates are durable if it has higher resistant to weathering. The durable aggregates are less likely
to degrade in the field and potentially less failure.

(a) (b)
Figure 1. Before and after Soundness Test

The soundness test repeatedly submerges an aggregate sample in a sodium sulfate (Na2SO4) or
magnesium sulfate (MgSO4) solution. Because of this solution, the salt crystals will be formed in the aggregate’s
water permeable pores.

The formation of these crystals creates internal forces that apply pressure on the pores of the aggregate
and tend to break the aggregate (Figure 1 - b). There are specified number of submerging and drying repetitions
which should be follow. After that, the aggregate is sieved to determine the percentage loss of material.

• Durability and soundness are terms typically given to an aggregate’s weathering resistance
characteristic.

Types of Soundness Tests

1. Sulfate Soundness – (AASHTO T 104) This test subjects the aggregate samples to repeated immersion
in either sodium sulfate or magnesium sulfate solution. Wu, Parker and Kandhal (1998) report that
just over half of the states have a sodium sulfate soundness requirement, while about one-fifth have a
magnesium sulfate soundness requirement.

Page 39 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

2. Freezing and Thawing Soundness - this test was specified in AASHTO T 103 and similar to the sulfate
soundness tests, however it uses actual freeze-thaw cycles with water or a weak ethyl alcohol – water
solution.
3. Aggregate Durability Index - This test, specified in AASHTO T 210, measures the relative resistance of
an aggregate to produce detrimental clay-like fines when subjected to mechanical methods of
degradation.

STANDARD METHOD OF TEST FOR SOUNDNESS OF AGGREGATE BY USE OF SODIUM SULFATE OR


MAGNESIUMSULFATE

REFERENCED STANDARD: AASHTO T 104

Apparatus Required: Balance, Oven, Sieves, Wire Mesh Basket, Container, Chemical Solutions
Basic Procedure:

1. Prepare the sulfate solution. When used, the sodium sulfate solution’s specific gravity should be
between 1.154 to 1.171 and the magnesium sulfate solution’s specific gravity should be between 1.297
and 1.306.
2. Prepare the Fine Aggregate. Obtain a sample that is large enough to yield at least 100 g of material on
each of the following sieves: No. 50 (0.300 mm), No. 30 (0.600 mm), No. 16 (1.18 mm), No. 8 (2.36
mm) and No. 4 (4.75 mm). Thoroughly wash the sample on a No. 50 (0.300 mm) sieve and dry it in an
oven at 230°F (110°C). Obtain 100 g of each size, record the weight, and place in separate containers for
the test
3. Prepare the coarse aggregate. Obtain enough material to yield at least the weights listed below:

4. Place each sample in separate containers for the test.

Page 40 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

5. Immerse the samples in the prepared solution of sodium sulfate or magnesium sulfate for 16 to 18 hours.
Cover the containers to reduce evaporation and prevent contamination and maintain the temperature
between 20.3 to 21.9°C for the immersion period.
6. Remove the samples and allow them to drain for 15 minutes.
7. Place the samples into an oven set at 230°F (110°C).
8. Allow the samples to dry until the change in mass is less than 0.1 percent over a 4 hour period (the weight
is checked on four hour intervals without letting the sample cool).
9. After the samples reach constant mass allow the samples to cool to 68 to 77°F (20 to 25°C); cooling may
be aided using an air conditioner or fan.
10. Repeat the immersion process (steps 4 through 8) until the specified number of cycles is obtained (five
cycles are normally performed).
11. After the final cycle is complete and the sample has cooled, wash the sample.
12. Check the thoroughness of washing by obtaining a sample of rinse water after it has passed through the
samples and adding 0.2 M barium chloride. If the sample water becomes cloudy when the barium chloride
is added, then continue to wash the sample.
13. After washing is complete, dry each fraction of the sample to a constant mass in an oven at 230°F (110°C).
14. Examine the aggregates.

Results:
For material that was coarser than 0.75 inches (19 mm) before test, the number of particles in each fraction
before test and the number of particles affected, classified as to number disintegrating, splitting, crumbling,
cracking and flaking is also measured.

Typical Values:
Typical values depend upon the type of soundness test used. The sodium sulfate loss is typically between about
0 and 15 percent, while the magnesium sulfate loss is typically between about 0 and 30 percent. For a
particular aggregate sample, the sodium sulfate loss will tend to be less than the magnesium sulfate loss by 0 to
20 percent with 5 to 10 percent being most typical.

Calculations (Interactive Equation)


For each aggregate size reported, determine the mass loss (in percent) using the following equation:

Where:
MB = mass before the test
MA = mass after the test
A weighted average (by mass) of each aggregate size tested should be calculated and reported as the overall mass
loss of the sample.
Problem 1 : The following table show the results of soundness and durability of aggregate by use of Sodium
Sulfate test. Calculate the percentage of loss.

Page 41 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Wt. of Sample Wt. of Sample


Sample
before Test, after test, W2, % Loss
No.
W1 (gm) (gm)
1 350 310 11.43 %
2 350 305 12.86 %
3 350 290 17.14 %
4 350 281 19.71 %
5 350 345 1.43 %
Average 12.51 %

Computation:
Formula
𝑊1 − 𝑊2
% 𝐿𝑜𝑠𝑠 = 𝑥 100
𝑊1
Sample 1
350 − 310
% 𝐿𝑜𝑠𝑠 = 𝑥 100 = 11.43%
350
Sample 2
350 − 305
% 𝐿𝑜𝑠𝑠 = 𝑥 100 = 12.86%
350
Sample 3
350 − 290
% 𝐿𝑜𝑠𝑠 = 𝑥 100 = 17.14%
350
Sample 4
350 − 281
% 𝐿𝑜𝑠𝑠 = 𝑥 100 = 19.71%
350
Sample 5
350 − 345
% 𝐿𝑜𝑠𝑠 = 𝑥 100 = 1.43%
350

Problem 2: Determine the mass loss (in percent)

Sieve size Mass (before test) Mass (after test) Loss (%)
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 100 g 99.4 g 0.6 %
No. 30 (0.600 mm) 175 g 173.8 g 0.69 %

ORGANIC IMPURITIES IN FINE AGGREGATE (COLOUR TEST)


Page 42 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

REFERENCED STANDARD: AASHTO T-21 or ASTM C40

In application, the aggregates must be free of clay, silt, and organic impurities. Organic impurities, usually
in the form of tannic acid and its derivatives, are typically present in fine aggregates such as sand. If present,
these impurities could influence the composition of the cement paste, strength and setting of the concrete.
Organic impurities in fine aggregate are determined by ASTM C40, Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete. The
excess clay and silt in an aggregate can cause an increase in shrinkage, affect durability, and cause separation
from the other aggregate particles.
The principal value of these test methods is to furnish a warning that injurious amounts of organic
impurities may be present. When the sample subjected to these tests produce a color darker than the standard
color it is advisable to perform the test for the effect of organic impurities on the strength of mortar in accordance
with Test Method.

Apparatus Required:

• Glass Bottles
• Glass Color Standard
Reagent and Standard Color Solution:

• Reagent Sodium Hydroxide Solution (3 %)—Dissolve 3 parts by mass of reagent grade sodium
hydroxide (NaOH) in 97 parts of water.
Test Sample :

The test sample shall have a mass of about approximately 450 g [1 lb].
Procedure:

1. Fill a glass bottle to the approximately 130-mL [4.5- fluid oz] level with the sample of the fine aggregate.
2. Add the sodium hydroxide solution until the volume of the fine aggregate and liquid, indicated after
shaking, is approximately 200 mL [7 fluid oz].
3. Stopper the bottle, shake vigorously, and then allow to stand for 24 h.
Determination of Color Value:

Page 43 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

• Glass Color Standard Procedure—To define more precisely the color of the supernatant liquid of the
test sample, five glass standard colors shall be used using the following colors:

Gardner Color Standard No. Organic Plate No.


5 1
8 2
11 3 (standard)
14 4
16 5
Reporting:

(a) If the color of the liquid above the fine aggregate is lighter than the reference color (standard), the amount of
organic impurities present in the fine aggregate under test is probably not significant and the sample is reported
as "Pass" on the test report.
(b) If the color of the liquid above the fine aggregate is darker than the reference color (standard), the sample is
reported "Fails" on the test report and desirability of performing further tests to assess the effect of organic
impurities on the concrete-making properties of the fine aggregate under test should be considered.

ABRASION TEST OF AGGREGATES


Page 44 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

REFERENCED STANDARD: AASHTO T 96 or ASTM C 131

Abrasion Test is the measure of aggregate toughness and abrasion resistance such as crushing, degradation
and disintegration. This test is suggested by AASHTO T 96 or ASTM C 131: Resistance to Degradation of Small-
Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in Machine.

The aggregates are used for the surface course of the highway pavements and they are subjected to wearing
due to movement of traffic.

When vehicles Travel on the road, the soil particles present between the pneumatic tires of vehicle and road
surface creates the abrasion effect on aggregates. The steel plate wheels of animal driven vehicles also cause
significant abrasion of the road surface.

Therefore, the aggregates used in road construction must be hard enough to resist abrasion. The resistance
offered by aggregate to abrasion is determined in the laboratory by test machine.

The Working principle of abrasion test is to produce abrasive action by use of standard steel balls, which
when mixed with aggregates and rotated in a drum for some specified time for a specific number of revolutions
also causes an impact on aggregates.

The percentage wear of the sample aggregates due to rubbing with steel balls is determined and is known
as Abrasion Value.

Apparatus Used for test:

• The apparatus is standardized as per IS: 2386 (Part IV) – 1963 consists of:

• Abrasion test Machine.


• Abrasive charge balls: Cast iron or steel balls, approximately 48mm in diameter and each weighing
between 390 to 445 gm; six to twelve balls are required

• Sieve: 1.70 mm, 2.36mm, 4.75mm, 6.3mm, 10mm, 12.5mm, 20mm, 25mm, 40mm, 50mm, 63mm,
80mm IS Sieves.
• The balance of capacity 5 kg or 10 kg is used.
• Oven Drying.
• Miscellaneous elements like a tray

Procedure for Abrasion Test:

1. The aggregates sample consists of clean aggregates dried in an oven at 105° – 110°C. The aggregates
sample should conform to any of the grading shown in below table.

2. Select the Size of aggregate to be used in the test such that it conforms to the grading to be used in
construction, to the maximum extent possible.

3. Take exactly 5 kg of the sample for grade A, B, C & D, and 10 kg for grading E, F & G.

Page 45 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

4. Choose the abrasive charge balls as per Table 2 depending on the grading of aggregates.
5. Place the aggregates and abrasive charge balls on the cylinder and fix the cover.
6. After that Rotate the machine at a speed of 30 to 33 revolutions per minute. The number of revolutions
should be 500 for grades A, B, C & D and 1000 for grading E, F & G.
7. The machine is stopped after the specified number of revolutions and aggregate sample is discharged to
a tray.
8. The entire stone dust made from a machine is sieved on 1.70 mm IS sieve.
9. The material size more than 1.7 mm size is weighed correct to one gram

Table 1: IS Recommended Test Samples – *Tolerance of ± 12 percent permitted.

Abrasion Test Grading Test Samples

Table 2: Abrasive Balls Charge Selection

Observations:

Original weight of aggregate sample = W1 g


The weight of aggregate sample retained = W2 g

Weight sample passing 1.7mm IS sieve = W1 – W2 g


Abrasion Value = (W1 – W2 ) / W1 X 100

Results:
Abrasion Value =

IS Recommended abrasion test Values for Pavements:

Abrasion test is performed to find the hardness of aggregates. On the basis of this value, the suitability of
aggregates for different road constructions can be judged as per IRC specifications as given

Page 46 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Page 47 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Self-Help: You can also refer to the sources below to help you further understand the lesson:

Kultermann E. and Spence, William. (2017). Construction Materials, Methods, and


Techniques: Building a sustainable future. 4th Edition. Australia: Cencage Learning

Ahmed, A. and Sturges, J. (2015). Materials science in construction: an introduction.


Abingdon, Oxon; New York, NY: Routledge

Let’s Check
Activity 1. Now that you know some types and properties of common construction materials let
us try to check how far you had learned. In the space provided, write the term/s being asked in
the following statements:
____________1. A broad category of coarse to medium grained particulate material used in construction,
including sand, gravel, and other more.
____________2. Products of which include building brick, roofing tile, and drainage pipe.
____________3. Those rocks of the earth that have been formed by the natural process of cooling and
crystallization from originally hot and molten magma.
____________4. Marble and slate are examples of what type of rocks according to geological
classification?
____________5. The ratio of mass of a given substance to the mass of water.
___________6. It is the capacity of a material to regain its initial shape and size after removal of load.
___________7. It is the ability to resist heat conduction and is the reciprocal of thermal conductivity.
___________8. It refers to the ability of a construction material to resist the effects of chemicals like acids,
salts and alkalis.
___________9. The measure of the resistance of an aggregate to sudden shock or impact.
__________10. A material used for mixing cement and other adhesive.

2.Calculate the bulk density when the combined mass of aggregate and measure is 1.6 kg and the mass
and volume of the measure itself is 0.9 kg and 0.6, respectively.

3.From the results of a sieve analysis, shown below, determine:


a. The percent finer than each sieve and plot a grain size distribution curve.
b. D10, D30, D60 from the grain-size distribution curve.
c. The uniformity coefficient, Cu. and
d. The coefficient of gradation, Cc.
Table 1

Sieve Number Mass of soil retained on each sieve (g)


4 0
10 44
20 56
40 82
60 51
80 106
100 92
200 85
Pan 35
Page 48 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Let’s Analyze
Activity 1. Getting acquainted with the types and properties of some common and advanced
construction materials. what also matters is you should also be able to explain some its
properties. Now, choose 5 most important properties of aggregates which you believe are
essential in determining its suitability for intended used in construction. Why?
2. Why is aggregate sample reduction important?
3. Why is it important to determine moisture content of aggregates?
4. Differentiate natural to synthetic construction materials.
5. Advantages and disadvantages of structural clay as construction materials.

In a Nutshell

Activity 1. The study of types and properties of construction materials is indeed pre-requisite to
becoming an engineer.

Based on the topics presented and learning exercises that you have done, please feel free to write
your arguments or lessons learned below. I have indicated my arguments or lessons learned.

1. Construction materials can be classified as natural such as leaves, twigs, woods, sand, etc. and synthetic
such as cement, concrete, metals, etc.
2. Igneous rocks, sedimentary rocks and metamorphic rocks are building stones under geological
classification.

Now it’s your turn.

3.
4.
5.

6.

7.

8.

10.

2. What are the commonly used building stones?

1. granite

2.basalt

Now it’s your turn.

Page 49 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Q&A List
Do you have any question for clarification?

Questions/Issues Answers

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Keywords Index
Building stones Structural clay Aggregates ASTM AASTHO
Sample size Moisture content Sieve analysis Specific gravity Absorption Bulk
density Soundness test

ULO 1b. Conduct the methods, procedures and formulas of different


experiments on common construction materials according to international
standards such as ASTM & AASTHO.

STANDARD EXPERIMENTS

Refer to Laboratory Manual


Experiment numbers 1 – 11

Page 50 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Week 4 to 5: Unit Learning Outcomes (ULO 2): At the end of the unit, you are expected to:

a. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the properties and behaviors of most common and
advance construction material such as cement, concrete and admixtures.
b. Conduct/Familiarize the methods, procedures and formulas of different experiments on common
construction materials according to international standards such as ASTM & AASTHO.

Big Picture in Focus

ULO 2a. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the properties and behaviors of most
common and advance construction material such as cement, concrete and admixtures.

Metalanguage
This section deals with the study of different types and properties of construction materials such as
cement, concrete and admixtures.

Please proceed immediately to the “Essential Knowledge”.


Essential Knowledge

To perform the aforesaid big picture (unit learning outcomes) for the next two (2) weeks of the course,
you need to fully understand the following essential knowledge that will be laid down in the succeeding
pages. Please note that you are not limited to exclusively refer to these resources. Thus, you are expected
to utilize other books, research articles and other resources that are available in the university’s library
e.g. ebrary, search.proquest.com etc.

INTRODUCTION: TYPES OF CEMENT USED IN CONSTRUCTION


What is cement?

Cement, one of the most important building materials, is a binding agent that sets and hardens to adhere to
building units such as stones, bricks, tiles, etc. Cement generally refers to a very fine powdery substance chiefly
made up of limestone (calcium), sand or clay (silicon), bauxite (aluminum) and iron ore, and may include shells,
chalk, marl, shale, clay, blast furnace slag, slate. The raw ingredients are processed in cement
manufacturing plants and heated to form a rock-hard substance, which is then ground into a fine powder to be
sold. Cement mixed with water causes a chemical reaction and forms a paste that sets and hardens to bind
individual structures of building materials.

Cement is an integral part of the urban infrastructure. It is used to make concrete as well as mortar, and to secure
the infrastructure by binding the building blocks. Concrete is made of cement, water, sand, and gravel mixed in
definite proportions, whereas mortar consists of cement, water, and lime aggregate. These are both used to bind
rocks, stones, bricks, and other building units, fill or seal any gaps, and to make decorative patterns. Cement
mixed with water silicates and aluminates, making a water repellant hardened mass that is used for water-
proofing.

TYPES OF CEMENT

Followings are the types of cement:

Page 51 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

1. Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC)


2. Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC)
3. Rapid Hardening Cement
4. Quick Setting Cement
5. Low Heat Cement
6. Sulphate Resisting Cement
7. Blast Furnace Cement
8. High Alumina Cement
9. White Cement
10. Colored Cement
11. Air Entraining Cement
12. Expansive Cement
13. Hydrophobic Cement

1. ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT (OPC)


In usual construction work, Ordinary Portland Cement is widely used. The composition of Ordinary Portland
Cement:

• Argillaceous or silicates of alumina (clay and shale)


• Calcareous or calcium carbonate (limestone, chalk, and marl)

Uses of Ordinary Portland Cement

• It is used for general construction purposes.


• It is also used in most of the masonry works.

2. PORTLAND POZZOLAND CEMENT(PPC)

Pozzolans are natural or synthetic materials that contain silica in reactive forms. It reacts with calcium hydroxide
generated by hydrating cement to form additional cementations materials when it is finely divided. The
composition of Portland Pozzolana Cement:

• OPC clinker
• Gypsum
• Pozzolanic Materials (Fly ash, volcanic ash, and Calcined clay or silica fumes.)

Uses of Portland Pozzolana Cement

• PPC is usually used in hydraulic structures, marine structures, construction near the seashore, dam
construction etc.
• It is also used in pre-stressed and post-tensioned concrete members.
• As it gives a better surface finish, it is used in decorative and art structures.
• It is also used in the manufacture of precast sewage pipes.

3. RAPID HARDINENING CEMENT

When finely grounded Tri-calcium silicate (C3S) is present in OPC with higher content, it gains strength more
quickly than OPC. This type of OPC is called Rapid Hardening Cement. It’s initial Setting Time 30 minutes and
Final Setting Time 600 minutes.

Page 52 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Uses of Rapid Hardening Cement

• Rapid hardening cement is mostly used where rapid construction is needed like the construction of
pavement.
• It also gives high strength.

4. QUICK SETTING CEMENT

Quick setting cement is the cement which sets in a very short time. The initial setting time is 5 minutes and the
final setting time is 30 minutes. The composition of Quick Setting Cement:

• Clinker
• Aluminum sulphate (1% to 3% by weight of clinker)
• The aluminum sulphate increase the hydration rate of silicate.

Uses of Quick Setting Cement

• It is used in underwater construction.


• It is also used in rainy & cold weather conditions.
• It is used a higher temperature where water evaporates easily.
• Used for anchoring or rock bolt mining and tunneling

5. LOW HEAT CEMENT

It is a spatial type of cement which produce low heat of hydration during setting. Some chemical composition of
Ordinary Portland Cement is modified to reduce the heat of hydration. The chemical composition of low heat
cement:

• A low percentage (5%) of tricalcium aluminate (C3A)


• A higher percentage (46%) of declaim silicate (C2S).

Uses of Low Heat Cement

• It is used for the construction of dam’s large footing, large raft slabs, and wind turbine plinths.
• It is also used for the construction of chemical plants.

6. SULPHATE RESISTING CEMENT

Sulphate resisting cement is used to resist sulphate attacks in concrete. Due to the lower percentage of Tricalcium
aluminate, the production of calcium sulpho-aluminates gets reduced.
Uses of Sulphates resisting Cement

• Construction in contact with soils or groundwater having more than 0.2% or 0.3 % g/l sulphate salts
respectively.
• Concrete surfaces subjected to alternate wetting and drying such as bridge piers, concrete surface in tidal
zone, apron, Building near seacoast.
• Effluent treatment plans, Chimney, Chemical industries, water storage, sumps, drainage works, Cooling
towers, Coastal protective works such as sea walls, breakwaters, tetrapods, etc.

Page 53 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

7. BLAST FURNACE CEMENT

Portland cement clinker and graunlated blast furnace slag are intergrinded to make blast furnace cement.
Maximum 65 percent of the mixture could be comprised by blast furnace slag.
Uses of Blast Furnace Cement

• It is highly sulphate resistant


• Frequently used in seawater construction.

8. HIGH ALUMINA CEMENT

High Alumina cement is obtained by mixing calcining bauxite (it’s an aluminium ore) and ordinary lime with
clinker during the manufacture of OPC. In which the total amount of alumina content should not be lesser than
32% and it should maintain the ratio by weight of alumina to the lime between 0.85 to 1.30.
Uses of High Alumina Cement

• It is used where concrete structures are subjected to high temperatures like workshop, refractory, foundries
etc
• It also used where the concrete is subjected to frost and acidic action.

9. WHITE CEMENT

White cement is quite similar to Ordinary Portland Cement except for color. Amounts of iron oxide and
manganese oxide are low in White Cement. It is expensive then OPC so not economical for ordinary work.
Uses of White Cement

• It is usually used in decorative work.


• It can also use for traffic barriers, tile grouts, swimming pools, roof tiles patching materials and terrazzo
surfaces.

10. COLORED CEMENT

To make 5 to 10 percent of suitable pigments are grinded with OPC. Types of pigments are selected according to
the desired color.
Uses of Colored Cement

• Colored cement is used for different decorative work.

11. AIR ENTRAINING CEMENT

It is seen that entrainment of air or formation of gas bubbles while applying cement increases resistance to frost
action, fire, scaling and other similar defects. Air-entraining cement is a special type of cement which entrains
tinny air bubbles in concrete.
It is produced by grinding minute air entertaining materials with clinker by adding some resinous materials e.g.
vinsol resin to ordinary portland cement.

Page 54 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

When the water in concrete gets frizzed due to low temperature, it expands. When air-entraining cement, the air
voids in concrete provides space for water to expand without cracking concrete. But this type of cement does not
provide high strength in concrete.
Uses of Air-Entraining Cement

• Especially it is used in areas where the temperature is very low.


• It also resists Sulphate attack.
• It is used where the de-icing chemical is used.

12. EXPANSIVE CEMENT

In the hydration process, the expansive cement expands its volume. It can be possible to overcome shrinkage loss
by using expansive cement.
There are three types of expansive cement:

1. K Type expansive cement


2. M Type expansive cement
3. S Type expansive cement

K Type expansive cement


Raw materials of these types of cement

• Portland cement
• Anhydrous tetracalcium trialuminate sulfate (C4A3S)
• Calcium sulfate (CaSO4)
• Lime (CaO).

M Type Expansive Cement


Raw materials of these types of cement

1. Portland cement clinkers


2. Calcium sulfate.

S Type Expansive Cement


Raw materials of these types of cement

1. Portland cement clinkers


2. Calcium sulfate (High amount)

• Tricalcium aluminate (C3A) (High amount)

Uses of Expansive cement

• It is used in the construction of the pre-stressed concrete component.


• It is also used for sealing joints and grouting anchor bolt.
• In the construction of different hydraulic structures, this type of cement is used.

Page 55 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

13. HYDROPHOBIC CEMENT

To resist the hydration process in the transportation or storage stage, clinkers are grinded with water repellent
film substance such as Oleic Acid or Stearic Acid. These chemicals form a layer on the cement particle and do not
allow water to mix and start the hydration process. When cement and aggregate are thoroughly mixed in the
mixer, protective layers break and start normal hydration with some air-entrainment which increases
workability.
Uses of Hydrophobic Cement

• Usually, it is used in the construction of water structures such as dams, spillways, or other submerged
structures.
• It is also used in the construction of underground structures like tunnel etc.

8 Main Cement Ingredients & Their Functions

Cement, as a binding material, is a very important building material. Almost every construction work requires
cement. Therefore, the composition of cement is a matter of great interest to engineers. For understanding
cement composition, one must know the functionality of Cement ingredients. By altering the amount of an
ingredient during cement production, one can achieve the desired cement quality.

Ingredients of Cement

Composition of Cement

There are eight major ingredients of cement. The following image is showing the ingredients of cement:

Page 56 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

The general percentage of these ingredients in cement is given below:

Ingredient Percentage in cement

Lime 60-65

Silica 17-25

Alumina 3-8

Magnesia 1-3

Iron oxide 0.5-6

Calcium Sulfate 0.1-0.5

Sulfur Trioxide 1-3

Alkaline 0-1

Functions of Cement Ingredients

The main features of these cement ingredients along with their functions and usefulness or harmfulness are given
below:

1. Lime: Lime is calcium oxide or calcium hydroxide.


o Presence of lime in a sufficient quantity is required to form silicates and aluminates of calcium.
o Deficiency in lime reduces the strength of property to the cement.
Page 57 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

o Deficiency in lime causes cement to set quickly.


o Excess lime makes cement unsound.
o Excessive presence of lime cause cement to expand and disintegrate.
2. Silica: Silicon dioxide is known as silica, chemical formula SiO2.
o Sufficient quantity of silica should be present in cement to dicalcium and tricalcium silicate.
o Silica imparts strength to cement.
o Silica usually presents to the extent of about 30 percent cement.
3. Alumina: Alumina is Aluminum oxide. The chemical formula is Al2O3.
o Alumina imparts quick setting property to the cement.
o Clinkering temperature is lowered by the presence of the requisite quantity of alumina.
o Excess alumina weakens the cement.
4. Magnesia: Magnesium Oxide. Chemical formula is MgO.
o Magnesia should not be present more than 2% in cement.
o Excess magnesia will reduce the strength of the cement.
5. Iron oxide: Chemical formula is Fe2O3.
o Iron oxide imparts color to cement.
o It acts as a flux.
o At a very high temperature, it imparts into the chemical reaction with calcium and aluminum to
form tricalcium alumino-ferrite.
o Tricalcium alumino-ferrite imparts hardness and strength to cement.
6. Calcium Sulfate: Chemical formula is CaSO4
o This is present in cement in the form of gypsum(CaSO 4.2H2O)
o It slows down or retards the setting action of cement.
7. Sulfur Trioxide: Chemical formula is SO3
o Should not be present more than 2%.
o Excess Sulfur Trioxide causes cement to unsound.
8. Alkaline:
o Should not be present more than 1%.
o Excess Alkaline matter causes efflorescence.

Properties of Cement- Physical & Chemical

Cement, a popular binding material, is a very important civil engineering material. This article concerns the
physical and chemical properties of cement, as well as the methods to test cement properties.

Page 58 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Physical Properties of Cement

Different blends of cement used in construction are characterized by their physical properties. Some key
parameters control the quality of cement. The physical properties of good cement are based on:

• Fineness of cement
• Soundness
• Consistency
• Strength
• Setting time
• Heat of hydration
• Loss of ignition
• Bulk density
• Specific gravity (Relative density)

These physical properties are discussed in details in the following segment. Also, you will find the test names
associated with these physical properties.

Fineness of Cement

The size of the particles of the cement is its fineness. The required fineness of good cement is achieved through
grinding the clinker in the last step of cement production process. As hydration rate of cement is directly related
to the cement particle size, fineness of cement is very important.

Page 59 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Soundness of Cement

Soundness refers to the ability of cement to not shrink upon hardening. Good quality cement retains its volume
after setting without delayed expansion, which is caused by excessive free lime and magnesia.

Tests:

Unsoundness of cement may appear after several years, so tests for ensuring soundness must be able to
determine that potential.

• Le Chatelier Test
This method, done by using Le Chatelier Apparatus, tests the expansion of cement due to lime. Cement
paste (normal consistency) is taken between glass slides and submerged in water for 24 hours at 20+1°C.
It is taken out to measure the distance between the indicators and then returned under water, brought
to boil in 25-30 mins and boiled for an hour. After cooling the device, the distance between indicator
points is measured again. In a good quality cement, the distance should not exceed 10 mm.
• Autoclave Test
Cement paste (of normal consistency) is placed in an autoclave (high-pressure steam vessel) and slowly
brought to 2.03 MPa, and then kept there for 3 hours. The change in length of the specimen (after
gradually bringing the autoclave to room temperature and pressure) is measured and expressed in
percentage. The requirement for good quality cement is a maximum of 0.80% autoclave expansion.
Standard autoclave test: AASHTO T 107 and ASTM C 151: Autoclave Expansion of Portland Cement.

Consistency of Cement

The ability of cement paste to flow is consistency.

It is measured by Vicat Test.

In Vicat Test Cement paste of normal consistency is taken in the Vicat Apparatus. The plunger of the appar
atus is brought down to touch the top surface of the cement. The plunger will penetrate the cement up to a
certain depth depending on the consistency. A cement is said to have a normal consistency when the plunger
penetrates 10±1 mm.

Strength of Cement

Three types of strength of cement are measured – compressive, tensile and flexural. Various factors affect the
strength, such as water-cement ratio, cement-fine aggregate ratio, curing conditions, size and shape of a specimen,
the manner of molding and mixing, loading conditions and age. While testing the strength, the following should
be considered:

• Cement mortar strength and cement concrete strength are not directly related. Cement strength is merely
a quality control measure.
• The tests of strength are performed on cement mortar mix, not on cement paste.
• Cement gains strength over time, so the specific time of performing the test should be mentioned.

Compressive Strength

Page 60 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

It is the most common strength test. A test specimen (50mm) is taken and subjected to a compressive load until
failure. The loading sequence must be within 20 seconds and 80 seconds.

Standard tests:

i. AASHTO T 106 and ASTM C 109: Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 50-mm or
2-in. Cube Specimens)
ii. ASTM C 349: Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using Portions of Prisms Broken in
Flexure)

Tensile strength

Though this test used to be common during the early years of cement production, now it does not offer any useful
information about the properties of cement.
Flexural strength

This is actually a measure of tensile strength in bending. The test is performed in a 40 x40 x 160 mm cement
mortar beam, which is loaded at its center point until failure.

Standard test:

i. ASTM C 348: Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars

Setting Time of Cement

Cement sets and hardens when water is added. This setting time can vary depending on multiple factors, such as
fineness of cement, cement-water ratio, chemical content, and admixtures. Cement used in construction should
have an initial setting time that is not too low and a final setting time not too high. Hence, two setting times are
measured:

• Initial set: When the paste begins to stiffen noticeably (typically occurs within 30-45 minutes)
• Final set: When the cement hardens, being able to sustain some load (occurs below 10 hours)

Again, setting time can also be an indicator of hydration rate.

Standard Tests:

i. AASHTO T 131 and ASTM C 191: Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle
ii. AASHTO T 154: Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Gillmore Needles
iii. ASTM C 266: Time of Setting of Hydraulic-Cement Paste by Gillmore Needles

Heat of Hydration

When water is added to cement, the reaction that takes place is called hydration. Hydration generates heat, which
can affect the quality of the cement and also be beneficial in maintaining curing temperature during cold weather.
On the other hand, when heat generation is high, especially in large structures, it may cause undesired stress.
The heat of hydration is affected most by C3S and C3A present in cement, and also by water-cement ratio, fineness

Page 61 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

and curing temperature. The heat of hydration of Portland cement is calculated by determining the difference
between the dry and the partially hydrated cement (obtained by comparing these at 7th and 28th days).

Standard Test:

ASTM C 186: Heat of Hydration of Hydraulic Cement

Loss of Ignition

Heating a cement sample at 900 - 1000°C (that is, until a constant weight is obtained) causes weight loss. This
loss of weight upon heating is calculated as loss of ignition. Improper and prolonged storage or adulteration
during transport or transfer may lead to pre-hydration and carbonation, both of which might be indicated by
increased loss of ignition.

Standard Test:

AASHTO T 105 and ASTM C 114: Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement

Bulk density

When cement is mixed with water, the water replaces areas where there would normally be air. Because of that,
the bulk density of cement is not very important. Cement has a varying range of density depending on the cement
composition percentage. The density of cement may be anywhere from 62 to 78 pounds per cubic foot.

Specific Gravity (Relative Density)

Specific gravity is generally used in mixture proportioning calculations. Portland cement has a specific gravity of
3.15, but other types of cement (for example, portland-blast-furnace-slag and portland-pozzolan cement) may
have specific gravities of about 2.90.

Standard Test:

AASHTO T 133 and ASTM C 188: Density of Hydraulic Cement

Chemical Properties of Cement

The raw materials for cement production are limestone (calcium), sand or clay (silicon), bauxite (aluminum) and
iron ore, and may include shells, chalk, marl, shale, clay, blast furnace slag, slate. Chemical analysis of cement raw
materials provides insight into the chemical properties of cement.

1. Tricalcium aluminate (C3A)


Low content of C3A makes the cement sulfate-resistant. Gypsum reduces the hydration of C 3A, which
liberates a lot of heat in the early stages of hydration. C3A does not provide any more than a little amount
of strength.
Type I cement: contains up to 3.5% SO3 (in cement having more than 8% C3A)
Type II cement: contains up to 3% SO3 (in cement having less than 8% C3A)

Page 62 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

2. Tricalcium silicate (C3S)


C3S causes rapid hydration as well as hardening and is responsible for the cement’s early strength gain an
initial setting.
3. Dicalcium silicate (C2S)
As opposed to tricalcium silicate, which helps early strength gain, dicalcium silicate in cement helps the
strength gain after one week.
4. Ferrite (C4AF)
Ferrite is a fluxing agent. It reduces the melting temperature of the raw materials in the kiln from 3,000°F
to 2,600°F. Though it hydrates rapidly, it does not contribute much to the strength of the cement.
5. Magnesia (MgO)
The manufacturing process of Portland cement uses magnesia as a raw material in dry process plants. An
excess amount of magnesia may make the cement unsound and expansive, but a little amount of it can add
strength to the cement. Production of MgO-based cement also causes less CO2 emission. All cement is
limited to a content of 6% MgO.
6. Sulphur trioxide
Sulfur trioxide in excess amount can make cement unsound.
7. Iron oxide/ Ferric oxide
Aside from adding strength and hardness, iron oxide or ferric oxide is mainly responsible for the color of
the cement.
8. Alkalis
The amounts of potassium oxide (K2O) and sodium oxide (Na2O) determine the alkali content of the
cement. Cement containing large amounts of alkali can cause some difficulty in regulating the setting time
of cement. Low alkali cement, when used with calcium chloride in concrete, can cause discoloration. In
slag-lime cement, ground granulated blast furnace slag is not hydraulic on its own but is "activated" by
addition of alkalis. There is an optional limit in total alkali content of 0.60%, calculated by the equation
Na2O + 0.658 K2O.
9. Free lime
Free lime, which is sometimes present in cement, may cause expansion.
10. Silica fumes
Silica fume is added to cement concrete in order to improve a variety of properties, especially compressive
strength, abrasion resistance and bond strength. Though setting time is prolonged by the addition of silica
fume, it can grant exceptionally high strength. Hence, Portland cement containing 5-20% silica fume is
usually produced for Portland cement projects that require high strength.
11. Alumina
Cement containing high alumina has the ability to withstand frigid temperatures since alumina is
chemical-resistant. It also quickens the setting but weakens the cement.

CEMENT MANUFACTURING PROCESS

Stage of Cement Manufacture

There are six main stages of cement manufacturing process.

Stage 1: Raw Material Extraction/Quarry

The raw cement ingredients needed for cement production are limestone (calcium), sand and clay (silicon,
aluminum, iron), shale, fly ash, mill scale and bauxite. The ore rocks are quarried and crushed to smaller pieces
of about 6 inches. Secondary crushers or hammer mills then reduce them to even smaller size of 3 inches. After
that, the ingredients are prepared for pyro processing.

Stage 2: Grinding, Proportioning and Blending


Page 63 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

The crushed raw ingredients are made ready for the cement making process in the kiln by combining them with
additives and grinding them to ensure a fine homogenous mixture. The composition of cement is proportioned
here depending on the desired properties of the cement. Generally, limestone is 80% and remaining 20% is the
clay. In the cement plant, the raw mix is dried (moisture content reduced to less than 1%); heavy wheel type
rollers and rotating tables blend the raw mix and then the roller crushes it to a fine powder to be stored in silos
and fed to the kiln.

Stage 3: Pre-Heating Raw Material

A pre-heating chamber consists of a series of cyclones that utilizes the hot gases produced from the kiln in order
to reduce energy consumption and make the cement making process more environment-friendly. The raw
materials are passed through here and turned into oxides to be burned in the kiln.
Stage 4: Kiln Phase

The kiln phase is the principal stage of the cement production process. Here, clinker is produced from the raw
mix through a series of chemical reactions between calcium and silicon dioxide compounds. Though the process
is complex, the events of the clinker production can be written in the following sequence:

1. Evaporation of free water


2. Evolution of combined water in the argillaceous components
3. Calcination of the calcium carbonate (CaCO3) to calcium oxide (CaO)
4. Reaction of CaO with silica to form dicalcium silicate
5. Reaction of CaO with the aluminum and iron-bearing constituents to form the liquid phase
6. Formation of the clinker nodules
7. Evaporation of volatile constituents (e. g., sodium, potassium, chlorides, and sulfates)
8. Reaction of excess CaO with dicalcium silicate to form tricalcium silicate

The above events can be condensed into four major stages based on the change of temperature inside the kiln:

1. 100°C (212°F): Evaporation of free water


2. 100°C (212°F)-430°C (800°F): Dehydration and formation of oxides of silicon, aluminum, and iron
3. 900°C (1650°F)-982°C (1800°F): CO2 is evolved and CaO is produced through calcination
4. 1510°C (2750°F): Cement clinker is formed

The kiln is angled by 3 degrees to the horizontal to allow the material to pass through it, over a period of 20 to
30 minutes. By the time the raw-mix reaches the lower part of the kiln, clinker forms and comes out of the kiln
in marble-sized nodules.

Stage 5: Cooling and final grinding

After exiting the kiln, the clinker is rapidly cooled down from 2000°C to 100°C-200°C by passing air over it. At
this stage, different additives are combined with the clinker to be ground in order to produce the final
product, cement. Gypsum, added to and ground with clinker, regulates the setting time and gives the most
important property of cement, compressive strength. It also prevents agglomeration and coating of the powder
at the surface of balls and mill wall. Some organic substances, such as Triethanolamine (used at 0.1 wt.%), are
added as grinding aids to avoid powder agglomeration. Other additives sometimes used are ethylene glycol, oleic
acid and dodecyl-benzene sulphonate.

Page 64 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

The heat produced by the clinker is circulated back to the kiln to save energy. The last stage of making cement is
the final grinding process. In the cement plant, there are rotating drums fitted with steel balls. Clinker, after being
cooled, is transferred to these rotating drums and ground into such a fine powder that each pound of it contains
150 billion grains. This powder is the final product, cement.

Stage 6: Packing and Shipping

Cement is conveyed from grinding mills to silos (large storage tanks) where it is packed in 20-40 kg bags. Most
of the product is shipped in bulk quantities by trucks, trains or ships, and only a small amount is packed for
customers who need small quantities.

Some of the numerous functions of cement are given below.

1. It is used in mortar for plastering, masonry work, pointing, etc.


2. It is used for making joints for drains and pipes.
3. It is used for water tightness of structure.
4. It is used in concrete for laying floors, roofs and constructing lintels, beams, stairs, pillars etc.
5. It is used where a hard surface is required for the protection of exposed surfaces of structures against the
destructive agents of the weather and certain organic or inorganic chemicals.
6. It is used for precast pipes manufacturing, piles, fencing posts etc.
7. It is used in the construction of important engineering structures such as bridges, culverts, dams, tunnels,
lighthouses etc.
8. It is used in the preparation of foundations, watertight floors, footpaths etc.
9. It is employed for the construction of wells, water tanks, tennis courts, lamp posts, telephone cabins, roads
etc.

Raw material ingredients used for manufacturing of Portland Cement are:

1. Calcareous Materials: Calcareous Materials are compounds of calcium and magnesium. Limestones are a
common calcareous material used in manufacturing cement.
2. Argillaceous Materials: Argillaceous Materials are mainly silica, alumina, and oxides of iron. Clay and
shale are the common argillaceous material used as cement ingredient in the process of manufacturing
cement.

Properties of Good Cement

It is always desirable to use the best cement in constructions. Therefore, the properties of a cement must be
investigated. Although desirable cement properties may vary depending on the type of construction, generally a
good cement possesses following properties (which depend upon its composition, thoroughness of burning and
fineness of grinding).

• Provides strength to masonry.


• Stiffens or hardens early.
• Possesses good plasticity.
• An excellent building material.
• Easily workable.
• Good moisture-resistant.

Page 65 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Proper field tests and laboratory tests should be done to ensure the qualities of the cement.

HYDRAULIC CEMENT BY VICAT NEEDLE


REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM C 191-42/ AASHTO T 131-93

Hydraulic Cement is a product used to stop water and leaks in concrete and masonry structures. It is a type of
cement, similar to mortar, that sets extremely fast and hardens after it has been mixed with water. Hydraulic
cement is used widely in the construction industry sealing structures below grade and in situations where
structures can be affected or submerged in water.
Vicat's Apparatus is used to find out the consistency, initial setting time and final setting time of the cement. In
the normal consistency test, we have to find out the amount of water to be added to the cement to form a cement
paste of normal consistency.

Vicat's Apparatus consists of an arrangement to hold the plunger of 10 mm diameter and two other needles which
are made to freely fall into a mound filled with the cement paste and the amount of penetration of the needles of
plunder can be noted using the vertical graduations from 0 mm to 50 mm.

Normal Consistency Test (ASTM 187-86 re approved 1991)


In the acceptance test for cement, the water content is regulated by bringing the paste to a standard condition of
wetness. This is called “Normal Consistency.”

Cement of normal consistency is required to measure setting time.


Definition of Terms:

Consistency – refers to the thickness or the viscosity of the cement paste.


Cement Paste - the viscous mass obtained by mixing cement with water.

Standard Cement Paste - is the cement paste for which the 10mm diameter plunger in a standard VICAT test
penetrates to such an extent that its distance from the bottom is 5-7mm.

Normal Consistency

• A standard measure of plasticity of a cement paste. A paste has normal consistency when a Vicat plunger
(10 mm in diameter) penetrates 10 ±1 mm in 30 sec under its own weight. The
• required water/cement ratio is determined by trial and error.
• It is the thickness or the viscosity of the standard paste and is expressed as the percentage of weight of
water.
• The quantity of mixing water to form a standard paste for setting and soundness test.
• It depends upon the compound composition and fineness of cement.
• About 24%~30% (by weight) for Portland cement.
Test Specifications:

• Temperature & Humidity


o The temperature of the air in the vicinity should be between 20-27.5 °C. The temperature of the
mixing water should be 23±2 °C. The relative humidity of the laboratory should not be less than
50%.
• Amount of Cement
o Amount of cement required for the test according to various specifications are mentioned below.
Page 66 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

▪ BS-12 = 500gm
▪ ASTM C-187 = 650gm
• Mixing Time
o The cement paste must be properly mixed and placed in the test specimen within a maximum
time of 4±1/4 min from the instant when cement and water were initially brought in contact.

Set Time Test (ASTM C 191 - 92)


Setting time is the term used to describe the stiffening of the cement paste, and it refers to a change from a fluid
state to a rigid state.

The knowledge of the setting time of the cement is always helpful in deciding the time duration to mix, transport,
place and compact the concrete effectively.

Definition of Terms:
Setting

• In the setting process, very little chemical reaction takes place. It only includes the shape acquisition due
to evaporation of water. During the setting process the cement remains in the fluid or the semi-fluid state
and there is very little or no gain in strength. Finer the cement particles more will be the hydration and
therefore it will lead to quick settlement.
Hardening

• Hardening is the rate of gain of strength due to the chemical reaction. It also refers to the strength of the
concrete after a specified interval of time.
Time of Initial Set

• The time elapsed between the initial contact of cement and water and the time when a 1mm2 cross-
section needle gives a reading between 4-7mm from the bottom in a standard Vicat apparatus is known
as initial setting time of that particular cement paste.
• The time at which the concrete can no longer be properly mixed, finished or compacted. (Represented by
a Vicat needle (1mm in diameter) penetration of 25 mm or less). ASTM C150 prescribes a minimum initial
setting time of 60 minute for Portland cement. (45 minutes (BS12:1978))
• We always prefer a larger initial setting time so that we can mix, transport and place the concrete easily.
According to ASTM specifications, the initial setting time shall not be less than 45 min but in the field, we
prefer an initial setting time not less than 90 min.
Time of Final Set

• It is the time elapsed between the initial contact of cement and water and the time when the smaller
needle (1mm2 cross-section and 0.5mm deep) completely penetrates into the paste and the outer metal
attachment of 5mm diameter does not leave an impression on the cement paste.
• The time required for the cement to harden to a point where it can sustain some load. (Represented by
no penetration of Vicat needle, the needle makes an impression and the cutting edge fails). ASTM C150
prescribes a maximum final setting time of 10-12 hours for Portland cement.
• A smaller value of the final setting time is always preferred in order to avoid large expenditures on the
formwork. According to most of the specifications, the final setting time shall not be greater than 10hrs
and shall not be less than (90 + 1.2 x (initial setting time)) min.

Page 67 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Factors affecting setting time:

• Temperature and humidity


• Amount of water (w/c)
• Chemical composition of cement
• Fineness of cement (finer cement → faster setting)

COMMON CONCRETE MIX PROPORTION AND ITS APPLICATION

What is Concrete?

Concrete, an artificial stone-like mass, is the composite material that is created by mixing binding material
(cement or lime) along with the aggregate (sand, gravel, stone, brick chips, etc.), water, admixtures, etc in specific
proportions. The strength and quality are dependent on the mixing proportions.

The formula for producing concrete from its ingredients can be presented in the following equation:

Concrete = Binding Material + Fine & Coarse Aggregate + Water + Admixture (optional)

Concrete is a very necessary and useful material for construction work. Once all the ingredients -
cement, aggregate, and water unit of measurement mixed inside the required proportions, the cement and water
begin a reaction with one another to bind themselves into a hardened mass. This hardens rock-like mass is the

concrete.

Concrete

Page 68 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Concrete is powerful, easy to create and could be formed into varied shapes and sizes. Besides that, it is
reasonable, low cost and is instantly mixed. It is designed to allow reliable and high-quality fast-track
construction. Structures designed with the concrete unit of measurement plenty of durable and should be
designed to face up to earthquakes, hurricanes, typhoons, and tornadoes. This is an incredible advancement. With
all the scientific advances there are in this world, there still has not been the way of preventing nature's injury.

Composition of Basic Concrete Mix

There are four basic ingredients within the concrete mix:

• Binding materials like cement or lime


• Aggregates or Inert Materials
o Fine aggregate (sand)
o Coarse aggregate (stone chips, brick chips)
• Water
• Admixture (e.g. Pozzolana)

Description of the concrete ingredients is given below.


Binding Materials

Binding material is the main element of a concrete mix. Cement is the most commonly used binding material.
Lime could also be used. When water is mixed with the cement, a paste is created that coats the aggregates within
the mix. The paste hardens, binds the aggregates and form a stone-like substance.
Aggregates

Sand is the fine mixture. Gravel or crushed stone is the coarse mixture in most mixes.
Water

Water is required to with chemicals react with the cement (hydration) and to supply workability with the
concrete. The number of water within the combine in pounds compared with the number of cement is named the
water/cement quantitative relation. The lower the w/c quantitative relation, the stronger the concrete. (Higher
strength, less permeability)

Types of Concrete Mix

Concrete is employed for various projects starting from little homemade comes to large subject field buildings
and structures. It is used for sidewalks, basements, floors, walls, and pillars at the side of several alternative uses.
Many sorts of concrete are utilized in the development works.

Based on the variations in materials and purposes, concrete can be classified into three basic categories-

1. Lime Concrete
2. Cement Concrete
3. Reinforced Cement Concretes

In general, there are four concrete sorts to settle on from counting on the work being done. Such as-

Page 69 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

1. Dry Ready Mix


2. Ready Mix
3. Bulk Dry Materials
4. Transit Mix

There are other various types of concrete for different applications that are created by changing the proportions
of the main ingredients. Such as:

• Regular Concrete
• High-strength Concrete
• Stamped Concrete
• High-Performance Concrete
• Self-consolidating Concretes
• Vacuum Concrete
• Shotcrete
• Roller-Compacted concrete
• Glass Concrete
• Asphalt Concrete
• Rapid Strength Concrete
• Polymer Concrete
• Limecrete
• Light-Transmitting Concrete

Descriptions of these types of concrete are discussed below:

Lime Concrete

Lime concrete uses lime as the binding material. Lime is usually mixed with surki and khoa or stones in the
proportion 1:2:5 unless otherwise specified. The khoa or stones are soaked in water before mixing. Lime concrete
is used mainly in foundation and terrace roofing.

Cement Concrete

Most engineering construction uses cement concrete composites as the main building material. It consists of
cement, sand, brick chips or stone chips of the required size. The usual proportion is 1:2:4 or 1:3:6. After mixing
the required amounts of materials, the concrete mix is cured with water for 28 days for proper strength building.

Reinforced Cement Concretes

For enhancing the tensile strength of concrete, steel reinforcements are added. Sometimes, RCC is prestressed
under compression to eliminate or reduce tensile stresses. The resulting concrete is known as Prestressed
Concrete.

Dry Ready Mix

This is the combination that may be found at the most home improvement and hardware stores. It comes in
baggage typically starting from sixty to eighty pounds. Dry ready mix is simple to combine and this is often the

Page 70 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

combination that almost all homemade comes would require. The tools needed for the mixture are a bucket or
cart, shovel or hoe, trowel and a measured quantity of water.

Ready Mix

The distinction between dry ready mix and ready-mix concrete is that the water is already supplementary to
ready combine. This concrete comes pre-mixed and is for larger homemade comes or for people who do not need
to combine their own concrete. It is typically brought in an exceedingly little trailer, typically with an intermixture
drum connected to stay it dampish and mixed. The ready combine is usually costlier and might be troublesome
to search out. It additionally should be used quickly as an alternative it will set while not unfolding properly.

Bulk Dry Materials

It is price effective to purchase dry materials in bulk. This may let the project be custom-built to the particular
wants and usage of the concrete. The drawback of shopping for in bulk is that there will be much space for the
materials to be kept before getting used. The materials will over probably be delivered to the positioning.

Transit Mix

This is the mix that almost all cast-in-place concrete comes can use. it is typically trucked in using concrete trucks
that have the massive drum that keeps the concrete from setting up whereas in transit. It permits for one
continuous pour so fewer seams and stronger concrete overall. For big comes, transit combine is far additional
value effective than getting bulk materials or ready-mix since in each those the workforce to combine the
concrete would get to be patterned into the value.

Regular Concrete

The most common type used is the regular concrete that is referred to as traditional weight concrete or
traditional strength concrete. This pertains to the concrete that is promptly on the market within the retailer’s
marketplace for personal and residential usage. This includes usage directions that are written within the
packaging of the product. It utilizes sand and different materials to function aggregates and is consolidated in
temporary vessels.

High-strength Concrete

High strength concrete combine possesses compressive strength that is over six thousand pounds per area unit.
This can be processed by lowering the water-cement quantitative relation to a minimum of 0.35 or lower. The
low water-cement quantitative relation makes this sort of cementless feasible. so as to combat this weakness,
superplasticizers are other to the present concrete combine.

Stamped Concrete

Stamped concrete is a subject area concrete wherever realistic patterns almost like natural stones, granites, and
tiles will be obtained by inserting the impression of skilled stamping pads. This stamping is applied on the
concrete once it is in its plastic condition. totally different coloring stains and texture work can finally provide an
end that's terribly almost like costlier natural stones. A high aesthetic look will be obtained from a sealed end
economically. This is often utilized in the development of driveways, interior floors, and patios.
Page 71 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

High-Performance Concrete

High-performance concrete refers to a freshly developed concrete combine that has properties that are a notch
higher compared to regular concrete mixes. This includes increased strength, durability, and workability,
simplicity of usage, compaction while not segregation, long-run mechanical properties, porosity, density,
toughness, and volume stability. Air-entrained agents may be utilized in order to customize this concrete
combine for severe environments.

Self-Consolidating Concrete

The concrete combine once placed can compact by its own weight is considered self-consolidated concrete. No
vibration should be provided for an equivalent individually. This combine has higher workability. The slumping
price is going to be between 650 and 750. This concrete because of its higher workability is named as flowing
concrete. The areas wherever there is thick reinforcement, self – consolidating concrete works best.

Vacuum Concretes

Concrete with water content quite the desired amount is poured into the formwork. The surplus water is then
removed out with the assistance of an air pump while not looking forward to the concrete to endure setting. Thus,
the concrete structure or the platform is going to be able to use earlier in comparison with traditional
construction technique. These concretes can attain their 28 days compressive strength inside an amount of 10
days and therefore the crushing strength of this structure is 25 you bigger compared with the standard concrete
sorts.

Shotcrete

Shotcreting refers to a method within which compressed air forces mortar or concrete through a tube and tap
onto a surface at a high speed and forms structural or non-structural parts of buildings. Shotcrete is currently
applied to the wet-mix method and has gained universal acceptance in several countries. In wet-mix application
cement, aggregate, admixture, and water are mixed along before being wired through a hose and atmospherically
designed. On the opposite hand, in dry-mix applications cement, aggregate, and admixture are mixed along, sent
pneumatically through a tube so, at the tap via a water ring, water is injected equally throughout the combination
because it is being designed.

Roller-Compacted Concrete

This type of concrete has placed and compacted with the assistance of earthmoving instrumentality like serious
rollers. This concrete is principally utilized in excavation and filling wants. These concretes have cement content
in lesser quantity and stuffed for the realm necessary. once compaction, these concretes give high density and
eventually cure into a powerful monolithic block.

Glass Concrete

The recycled glass may be used as aggregates in concrete. Thus, we tend to get concrete of recent times, the glass
concrete. This concrete can increase the aesthetic appeal of the concrete. They can give long strength and higher
thermal insulation.

Page 72 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Asphalt Concrete

Asphalt concrete may be a material, the mixture of aggregates and asphalts ordinarily accustomed surface roads,
parking tons, airports, yet because of the core of mound dams. Asphalt concrete is known as asphalt, blacktop, or
pavement and tarmac or bitumen, macadam or rolled asphalt in the other countries.

Rapid Strength Concrete

As the name implies these concretes can acquire strength with few hours once its manufacture. Therefore, the
formwork removal is created simple and the building construction is roofed quickly. These have a widespread
application within the road repairs, as they'll be reused once some hours.

Polymer Concrete

In polymer concrete, the aggregates are restrained with the polymer rather than cement. The assembly of
polymer concrete can facilitate within the reduction of volume of voids within the mixture. This may cut back the
quantity of polymer that is necessary to bind the aggregates used. Hence, the aggregates are ranked and mixed
consequently to attain minimum void. This kind of concrete has totally different classes:

• Polymer Impregnated Concrete


• Polymer cement concrete
• Partially Impregnated

Limecrete

The cement is replaced by lime during this concrete kind. The most application of this product is on floors, domes,
likewise as vaults. These not like cement have several environmental and health advantages. These products are
renewable and simply clean.

Light-Transmitting Concrete

Concrete that has a density lesser than 1920kg/m3 are classified as light-weight concrete. The utilization of
lightweight aggregates in a concrete style can provide us lightweight aggregates. Aggregates are the vital part
that contributes to the density of the concrete. The samples of lightweight aggregates are stone, perlites, and
scoria. The lightweight concrete is applied for the protection of the steel structures and is used for the
development of the long-span bridge decks. These are used for the development of the building blocks.
Main Properties of Concrete for Construction

Concrete is a mixture of several materials. At the hardened state, this heterogeneous material becomes stone-
like mass. The extensive use of concrete in the construction field has made it a material of huge concern for
engineers. To participate in the vast uses of concrete an engineer must know its properties.

Page 73 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE:

1.Strength

Strength of concrete are of the following types:

a. Compressive strength
b. Tensile strength
c. Flexural strength
d. Shear strength

a. Compressive Strength

Two types of test specimens are used in Bangladesh -(1) Cube and (2) Cylinder.

The cube specimens of concrete of the desired proportion are cast in steel or cast iron molds, normally 6-inch
cube. The standard cylinder specimen of concrete is 6 inch in diameter and 12 inches in height and cast in a mold
generally made of cast iron;

Standard cubes and cylinders are tested at prescribed ages, generally, 28 days, with additional tests often made
at 1, 3, and 7 days. The specimens are tested for crushing strength under a testing machine. The cube tests give
much greater values of crushing strength, usually 20 to 30 % more than those given by cylinders.

Page 74 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

According to British standard, the strength of a cylinder specimen is equal to three-quarters of the strength of
the cube specimen.

Figure: Cube and Cylinder Specimens for Compression Strength Testing.

Effect of age on concrete strength:

Concrete attains strength with time. Ordinary cement concrete gains above 70 to 75% of its final strength within
28 days and about 90 to 95 % in the course of one year. It is often desirable to check the suitability of a concrete
long before the results of the 28-day test are available. When no specific data on the materials used in making
concrete are available, the 28-day strength may be assumed to be 1.5 times of the 7 days’ strength. Tests have
shown that for concrete made with ordinary Portland cement the ratio of the 28 days to 7 days’ strength generally
lies between 1.3 to 1.7, and the majority of the results fall above 1.5. The extrapolation of 28 days’ strength from
the 7 days’ strength is, therefore quite reliable;

The rate of gain of strength of the different type of cement concretes are shown in the figure below

Page 75 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

b. Tensile strength

Concrete is very weak in tension. The tensile strength of ordinary concrete ranges from about 7 to 10 percent of
the compressive strength.

c. Flexural strength

The flexural strength of plain concrete is almost wholly dependent upon the tensile strength. However,
experiments show that the modulus of rupture is considerably greater than the strength in tension.

d. Shear strength

It is the real determining factor in the compressive strength of short columns. The average strength of concrete
in direct shear varies from about half of the compressive strength for rich mixtures to about 0.8 of the
compressive strength for lean mixtures.

2.Workability

The strength of concrete of a given mix proportion is very seriously affected by the degree of its compaction. It is
therefore vital that the consistency of the mix be such that the concrete can be transported, placed and finished
sufficiently easily and without segregation. A concrete satisfying these conditions is said to be workable.

Factors affecting the workability of concrete are:

▪ Water Content
▪ Mix Proportions
▪ Size of Aggregates
▪ Shape of Aggregates
▪ Grading of Aggregates
▪ Surface Texture of Aggregates
▪ Use of Admixtures
▪ Use of Supplementary Cementitious Materials
▪ Time
▪ Temperature

Usually, Slump test is done to indirectly determine the workability of a concrete mix.

3.Elastic Properties

Concrete is not perfectly elastic for any range of loading, an appreciable permanent setting taking place for even
low loads. The deformation is not proportional to the stress at any stage of loading. The elastic properties of
concrete vary with the richness of the mixture and with the intensity of the stress. They also vary with the age of
concrete.

4.Durability

Durability is the property of concrete to withstand the condition for which it has been designed, without
deterioration over a period of years. Lack of durability can be caused by external agents arising from the
environment or by internal agents within the concrete.
Page 76 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Causes can be categorized as physical, mechanical and chemical.

Physical cause arises from the action of frost and from differences between the thermal properties
of aggregate and of the cement paste, while mechanical causes are associated mainly with abortion.

5.Impermeability

Penetration of concrete by materials in solution may adversely affect its durability, for instance, when Ca(OH) 2 is
being leached out or an attack by aggressive liquids (acids) takes place. Permeability has an important bearing
on the vulnerability of concrete to water and frost. In the case of reinforced cement concrete, the penetration of
moisture and air will result in the corrosion of steel. This leads to an increase in the volume of the steel, resulting
in cracking and spalling of the concrete. Permeability of concrete is also of importance for liquid retaining and
hydraulic structures;

6.Segregation

The tendency of separation of coarse aggregate grains from the concrete mass is called segregation. It increases
when the concrete mixture is lean and too wet. It also increases when rather large and rough-textured aggregate
is used. The phenomenon of segregation can be avoided as follows.

i. Addition of little air-entraining agents in the mix.


ii. Restricting the amount of water to the smallest possible amount.
iii. All the operations like handling, placing and consolidation must be carefully conducted.
iv. Concrete should not be allowed to fall from large heights.

7.Bleeding

The tendency of water to rise to the surface of freshly laid concrete is known as bleeding. The water rising to the
surface carries with it, particles of sand and cement, which on hardening form a scum layer is popularly known
as laitance. Concrete bleeding can be checked by adopting the following measures.

i. By adding more cement


ii. By using more finely ground cement
iii. By properly designing the mix and using the minimum quantity of water
iv. By using little air entraining agent
v. By increasing the finer part of fine aggregate

8.Fatigue

Plain concrete when subjected to flexure, exhibits fatigue. The flexure resisting ability of concrete of a given
quality is indicated by an endurance limit whose value depends upon the number of repetitions of stress. In
concrete pavement design, the allowable flexural working stress is limited to 55% of the modulus of rupture.
9.Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete

Modulus of elasticity (also known as elastic modulus, the coefficient of elasticity) of a material is a number
which is defined by the ratio of the applied stress to the corresponding strain within the elastic limit. Physically

Page 77 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

it indicates a material’s resistance to being deformed when a stress is applied to it. Modulus of elasticity also
indicates the stiffness of a material. Value of elastic modulus is higher for the stiffer materials.

Modulus of Elasticity, E = f/s

Where:

f = applied stress on the body

s = strain to correspond to the applied stress

Determination of Modulus of
Elasticity Concrete. Source: http://civilarc.com

Units of Elastic Modulus

Units of elastic modulus are followings:

• In SI unit MPa or N/mm2 or KN/m2.


• In FPS unit psi or ksi or psf or ksf.

Page 78 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete

Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete can be defined as the slope of the line drawn from stress of zero to a compressive
stress of 0.45f’c. As concrete is a heterogeneous material. The strength of concrete is dependent on the relative
proportion and modulus of elasticity of the aggregate.

To know the accurate value of elastic modulus of a concrete batch, laboratory test can be done. Also, there are
some empirical formulas provided by different code to obtain the elastic modulus of Concrete. These formulas
are based on the relationship between modulus of elasticity and concrete compressive strength. One can easily
obtain an approximate value of modulus of elasticity of concrete using 28 days concrete strength (f’c) with these
formulas.
Elastic Modulus of Concrete from ACI Code

Different codes have prescribed some empirical relations to determine the Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete. Few
of them are given below.

According to ACI 318-08 section 8.5,

Modulus of elasticity for concrete,

This formula is valid for values of w c between 1440 and 2560 kg/m3.

For normal-weight concrete,

Elastic Modulus of Concrete from BNBC

According to BNBC 2006 section 5.13.2.1,

For stone aggregate concrete,

for normal density concrete

Page 79 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

For brick aggregate concrete,

Uses of Concrete
Some utilization of concrete are given below:

1. It’s an important building product. Concrete is chosen over wood as a construction material.
2. It is a durable and cost-effective material which is a necessity for underground use.
3. Concrete is a sustainable choice for residential and commercial projects.
4. The strength of concrete increases over time.
5. Concrete can hold up against weather condition and is easy to maintain.
6. It is budget friendly to use everywhere. It is easy to repair & energy efficient.
7. Concrete is safe for building occupants.
8. Concrete is an inert material which doesn’t burn, mildew or feed rot.
9. Its superior structural integrity provides added degree of protection from the severe weather as well as
an earthquake.
10. Concrete walls and floors make a home quite place of rest, relaxation and rejuvenation.
11. Concrete is produced from locally available materials and leaves a small environmental footprint while
still providing high-level durability.
12. It is used as aggregate in roadbeds or as granular materials while making new concrete.
13. Concrete is fire resistant. It can resist extreme level of flames and heat which is a good choice of the ceiling
in a storage room.
14. Concrete can be shaped in various forms when freshly mixed.
15. Concrete isn’t sensitive to moisture.
16. It doesn’t release any volatile organic compounds into the air which is environment-friendly.
17. Concrete gives a longer service life.
18. It keeps home safe from insects. It doesn’t attract insect pest and rodents. That’s why small animals
cannot burrow through the concrete to make a home.
19. Concrete has multiple design possibilities.
20. Concrete can be used to achieve optimum environmental performance.
21. As it is recyclable, it is possible to use it for addition.
22. High-performance concrete is used to build bridges.
23. Concrete is able to accommodate steel reinforcements in gates, tunnel lines, electrical controls.
24. A concrete floor can be stamped to create an attractive surface. It can admit natural light during the day
and transmit artificial light after work.
25. Concrete is used in driveways and patios.

Different types of concrete grades and their uses

Grades of concrete are defined by the strength and composition of the concrete, and the minimum strength the
concrete should have following 28 days of initial construction. The grade of concrete is understood in
measurements of MPa, where M stands for mix and the MPa denotes the overall strength.

Concrete mixes are defined in ascending numbers of 5, starting at 10, and show the compressive strength of the
concrete after 28 days. For instance, C10 has the strength of 10 newtons, C15 has the strength of 15 newtons,
C20 has 20 newtons strength and so on.
Page 80 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Different mixes (M) come in various mix proportions of the various ingredients of cement, sand and coarse
aggregates. For instance, M20 comes in the respective ratio of 1:1:5:3. You can see other examples below in the
table.

Compressive Strength
Concrete GradeMix Ratio (cement : sand : aggregates)
MPa (N/mm2)Psi

Grades of Concrete
M5 1 : 5 : 10 5 MPa 725 psi

M7.5 1:4:8 7.5 MPa 1087 psi


M10 1:3:6 10 MPa 1450 psi

M15 1:2:4 15 MPa 2175 psi

M20 1 : 1.5 : 3 20 MPa 2900 psi


Standard Grade of Concrete

M25 1:1:2 25 MPa 3625 psi


M30 Design Mix 30 MPa 4350 psi

M35 Design Mix 35 MPa 5075 psi


M40 Design Mix 40 MPa 5800 psi
M45 Design Mix 45 MPa 6525 psi

High Strength Concrete Grades


M50 Design Mix 50 MPa 7250 psi

M55 Design Mix 55 MPa 7975 psi

M60 Design Mix 60 MPa 8700 psi


M65 Design Mix 65 MPa 9425 psi

M70 Design Mix 70 MPa 10150 psi

Page 81 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Below is a list of a few of the initial concrete grades and what they are best used for.

C10

Used for: Patio slabs, pathways and non-structural work

Type: Domestic & commercial use

C15

Used for: Pavement kerbs and floor blinding

Type: Domestic & Commercial

C20

Used for: Domestic floors and foundations (where the weight of structure will be lighter). Also good for workshop
bases, garages, driveways and internal floor slabs.

Type: Domestic

C25

Used for: Construction in all areas. Multi-purpose concrete mix, usually used for foundations.

Type: Domestic & Commercial

C30

Page 82 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Used for: Pathways and roadways (this is the lowest grade concrete mix that can be used for this purpose). More
durable than the grades that have come before, and thus is much more weather-resistant and can take heavy
road traffic.

Type: Commercial

C35

Used for: Commercial structures. This heavy concrete mix is usually used for creating external walls and slabs,
as well as for structural piling.

Type: Commercial

C40

Used for: Commercial construction sites, creating foundations and beams for structural support and roads. The
most durable in this list, C40 can withstand chemical corrosion also, so is frequently used on farms where slurry
could corrode structures, or in septic tanks.

Type: Commercial

PORTLAND AND HYDRAULICS CEMENT CONCRETE


HYDRAULICS CEMENT:
Hydraulic Cement is a product used to stop water and leaks in concrete and masonry structures. It is a
type of cement, similar to mortar, that sets extremely fast and hardens after it has been mixed with water.
Hydraulic cement is used widely in the construction industry sealing structures below grade and in situations
where structures can be affected or submerged in water.

USES:

• Swimming Pools
• Drainage systems
• Foundations
• Elevator pits
• Basement walls
• Manholes
• Sealing around concrete and masonry structures
• Marine applications.
• Chimneys
• Cisterns and fountains

PORTLAND CEMENT:

Portland cement may be defined as a product obtained by finely pulverizing clinker produced by calcining
to incipient fusion, an intimate and properly proportioned mixture of argillaceous and calcareous materials. Care
must be exercised in proportioning the raw materials so that the clinker of proper constitution may be obtained
after burning.
Portland cement is a hydraulic cement capable of setting, hardening and remains stable under water. It
is composed of calcium silicates and some amount of gypsum.
Page 83 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

FIGURE: A FLOW DIAGRAM OF PORTLAND CEMENT PRODUCTION

TYPES OF PORTLAND CEMENT:

TYPE
I General purpose
IA Same as Type I, but when air entrainment is desired
II For moderate sulfate resistance
IIA Same as type II, but when air entrainment is desired
II(MH) much like Type II, but when moderate heat of hydration is desired
II(MH)A same as Type II(MH), but when air entrainment is desired
III for high early strength
IIIA same as Type III, but when air entrainment is desired
IV for low heat of hydration
V for high sulfate resistance

Types IA, IIA and IIIA are cements used to make air-entrained concrete. They have the same properties
as types I, II, and III, except that they have small quantities of air-entrained materials combined with them.
Type I: General purpose, for use when the special properties specified for any other types are not required. It is
used as general or normal purpose Portland cement in construction work. It is commonly used for general
construction, especially when making precast, and precast – prestressed concrete that is not to be in contact with
soils or groundwater. Type 1 cement is general use cement in every construction work unless another cement is
specified for construction works

Type II: It is used for constructing structures in which water or soil containing less amount of sulfate. This type
of cement is used where less heat is required during hydration.

Type III: This type of cement is used where high strength is required at a very early period of time. This type of
cement gives a good three-day compressive strength equal to the seven-day compressive strength of types I and
Page 84 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

II cement. It is usually used for precast concrete manufacture, where high one-day strength allows a fast turnover
of molds. It can also be used in emergency construction and repairs, and construction of machine bases and gate
installations.

Type IV: This type of cement is used where the amount and rate of heat generation must be kept to a minimum.
This type of cement is used where low heat of hydration is required.

Type V: This type is used in concrete to be exposed to alkali soil and groundwater sulfates. It is used as sulfate
resistance Portland cement in construction works.

ADMIXTURES

What is Admixture?

Admixtures are natural or manufactured chemicals which are added to the concrete before or during mixing. The
most often used admixtures are air-entraining agents, water reducers, water-reducing retarders and
accelerators.

Types of Concrete Admixtures

Concrete admixtures are of different types and they are as follows:

1. Accelerating Admixtures
2. Air entraining concrete admixture
3. Pozzolanic Admixtures
4. Damp-proofing Admixtures
5. Gas forming Admixtures
6. Air detraining Admixtures
7. Alkali Aggregate Expansion Inhibiting Admixtures
8. Anti-washout Admixtures
9. Grouting Admixtures
10. Corrosion Inhibiting Admixtures
11. Bonding Admixtures
12. Fungicidal, Germicidal, Insecticidal Admixtures
13. Coloring Admixtures

1. Water Reducing Admixtures

Water reducing admixtures, the name itself defining that they are used to minimize the water demand in a

concrete mix. Workability is the important property of concrete which is improved with the addition of water

but if water is added more than required the strength and durability properties of concrete gets affected.

In addition to increase in workability it also improves the strength of concrete, good bond between concrete and

steel, prevents cracking, segregation, honeycombing, bleeding etc.


Page 85 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Water reducing admixtures are also called as plasticizers and these are classified into three types namely

plasticizers, mid-range plasticizers and super plasticizers. Normal plasticizer reduces the water demand up to

10%, mid-range plasticizers reduce the water demand up to 15% while super plasticizers reduce the water

demand up to 30%.

Calcium, sodium and ammonium lignosulphonates are commonly used plasticizers. Some of the new generation

super plasticizers are acrylic polymer based, poly carboxylate, multicarbovylatethers etc.

Fig 1: Water Reducing Admixture

2. Retarding Admixtures

Retarding admixtures slow down the rate of hydration of cement in its initial stage and increase the initial setting

time of concrete. These are also called as retarders and used especially in high temperature zones where concrete

will set quickly.

The quick setting in some situations may lead to discontinuities in structure, poor bond between the surfaces,

creates unnecessary voids in concrete etc. Retarders are useful to eliminate this type of problems.

Commonly used retarding admixture is calcium sulphate or gypsum. Starch, cellulose products, common sugar,

salts of acids are some other retarders. Most of water reducing admixtures are also acts as retarding admixtures

and they are called as retarding plasticizers.


Page 86 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Fig 2: Retarding Admixture (Gypsum)

3. Accelerating Admixtures

Accelerating admixtures are used to reduce the initial setting time of concrete. They speed up the process of

initial stage of hardening of concrete hence they are also called as accelerators. These accelerators also improves

the strength of concrete in it early stage by increasing the rate of hydration.

Earlier hardening of concrete is useful in several situations such as early removal of formwork, less period of

curing, emergency repair works, for constructions in low temperature regions etc.

Some of the accelerating admixtures are triethenolamine, calcium formate, silica fume, calcium chloride, finely

divided silica gel etc. Calcium chloride is the cheap and commonly used accelerating admixture.

Fig 3: Accelerator (Silica Fume)

4. Air Entraining Concrete Admixture

Air entraining admixtures are one of the most important inventions in concrete technology. Their primary

function is to increase the durability of concrete under freezing and thawing conditions. When added to concrete

Page 87 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

mix, these admixtures will form millions of non-coalescing air bubbles throughout the mix and improves the

properties of concrete.

Air entrainment in concrete will also improve the workability of concrete, prevents segregation and bleeding,

lower the unit weight and modulus of elasticity of concrete, improves the chemical resistance of concrete and

reduction of cement or sand or water content in concrete etc.

Most used air entrainment admixtures are vinsol resin, darex, Teepol, Cheecol etc. These admixtures are actually

made of Natural wood resins, alkali salts, animal and vegetable fats and oils etc.

Fig 4: Freezing and Thawing Effect on Concrete

5. Pozzolanic Admixtures

Pozzolanic admixtures are used to prepare dense concrete mix which is bets suitable for water retaining

structures like dams, reservoirs etc. They also reduce the heat of hydration and thermal shrinkage.

Best pozzolanic materials in optimum quantity gives best results and prevents or reduces many risks such as

alkali aggregate reaction, leaching, sulfate attack etc.

Page 88 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Pozzolanic materials used as admixtures are either natural or artificial. Naturally occurring Pozzolanic materials

are clay, shale, volcanic tuffs, pumicite, etc. and artificial pozzolans available are fly ash, silica fume, blast furnace

slag, rice husk ash, surkhi etc.

Fig 5: Fly ash

6. Damp-proofing Admixtures

Damp proofing or water proofing admixtures are used to make the concrete structure impermeable against water

and to prevent dampness on concrete surface. In addition to water proof property, they also acts like accelerators

in early stage of concrete hardening.

Damp proofing admixtures are available in liquid form, powder form, paste form etc. The main constituents of

these admixtures are aluminum sulfate, zinc sulfate aluminum chloride, calcium chloride, silicate of soda etc.

which are chemically active pore fillers.

Page 89 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Fig 6: Dampness on Concrete Surface

7. Gas forming Admixtures

Aluminum powder, activated carbon, hydrogen peroxide are generally used gas forming chemical admixtures.

When gas forming admixtures are added, it reacts with hydroxide obtained by the hydration of cement and forms

minute bubbles of hydrogen gas in the concrete.

The range of formation of bubbles in concrete is depends upon many factors such as amount of admixture,

chemical composition of cement, temperature, fineness etc. The formed bubbles helps the concrete to counteract

the settlement and bleeding problems.

Page 90 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Fig 7: Activated Carbon Powder

Gas forming admixtures are also used to prepare light weight concrete. For settlement and bleeding resistance

purpose, small quantity of gas forming admixtures which is generally 0.5 to 2% by weight of cement is used. But

for making light weight concrete larger quantity generally 100 grams per bag of cement is recommended.

8. Air detraining Admixtures

Air-detraining Admixtures are used to remove the excess air from the concrete voids. Sometimes, the aggregates

may release the gas into concrete and air entrained is more than required then this type of admixtures are useful.

Some of the mostly used air-detraining admixtures are tributyl phosphate, silicones, water insoluble alcohols etc.

9. Alkali Aggregate Expansion Preventing Admixtures

Alkali aggregate expansion in concrete is happened by the reaction of alkali of cement with the silica present in

the aggregates. It forms a gel like substance and cause volumetric expansion of concrete which may lead to

cracking and disintegration.

Use of pozzolanic admixtures will prevent the alkali-aggregate reaction and in some cases air-entraining

admixtures are also useful. Generally used admixtures to reduce the risk of alkali aggregate reaction are

aluminum powder and lithium salts.

Page 91 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Fig 8: Effect of Alkali Aggregate Reaction on Concrete

10. Anti-washout Admixtures

Anti-washout admixtures are used in concrete especially for under water concrete structure. It protect the

concrete mix from being washed out under water pressure. It improves the cohesiveness of concrete.

This type of admixtures are prepared from natural or synthetic rubbers, cellulose based thickeners etc.

Fig 9: Underwater Concreting

11. Grouting Admixtures

Page 92 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Grouting admixtures are added to grout materials to improve the grout properties according to the requirement

of grout. Sometimes, there is a need of quick set grout and sometimes there is a need of slow set grout to spread

into deep cracks or fissures.

Hence, different admixtures are used as grout admixtures based on situation. Accelerators like calcium chloride,

triethanolamine etc. are used as grout admixtures when the grout is to be set rapidly. Similarly retarders like

mucic acid, gypsum etc. are used to slow down the setting time of grout.

Gas forming admixtures like aluminum powder is added to grout material to counteract the settle of foundations.

Fig 10: Grouting

12. Corrosion Preventing Admixtures

Corrosion of steel in reinforced concrete structure is general and it is severe when the structure is exposed to

saline water, industrial fumes, chlorides etc. To prevent or to slow down the process of corrosion preventing

admixtures are used.

Some of the corrosion preventing admixtures used in reinforced concrete are sodium benzoate, sodium nitrate,

sodium nitrite etc.

Page 93 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Fig 11: Corrosion of Steel in Concrete

13. Bonding Admixtures

Bonding admixtures are used to create a bond between old and fresh concrete surfaces. In general, if fresh

concrete is poured over a hardened concrete surface, there is a chance of failure of fresh concrete surface due to

weak bond with old surface.

To make the bond stronger, bonding admixtures are added to cement or mortar grout which is applied on the

concrete surface just before placing fresh concrete. This type of admixtures are used for pavement overlays,

screed over roof provision, repair works etc.

Bonding admixtures are water emulsions and they are made from natural rubber, synthetic rubbers, polymers

like poly vinyl chloride, polyvinyl acetate etc.

Page 94 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Fig 12: Concrete Pavement Overlay

14. Fungicidal, Germicidal, Insecticidal Admixtures

To prevent the growth of bacteria, germs, fungus on hardened concrete structures, it is recommended that the

mix should have fungicidal, germicidal and insecticidal properties. This properties can be developed by adding

admixtures like polyhalogenated phenols, copper compounds and dieledren emulsions etc.

Fig 13: Concrete affected by Fungi

15. Coloring Admixtures

Coloring admixtures are the pigments which produce color in the finished concrete. The admixtures used to

produce color should not affect the concrete strength. Generally coloring admixtures are added to cement in a

ball mill, then colored cement can be obtained which can be used for making colored concrete. Some of the

coloring admixtures and their resultant colors are tabulated below.


Page 95 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Table 1: Coloring Admixtures and their Resultant Colors


Admixture Color obtained

Iron or Red oxide Red

Hydroxides of iron Yellow

Barium manganite and Ultramarine Blue

Chromium oxide and chromium hydroxide Green

Ferrous oxide Purple

Carbon black Black

Manganese black , Raw umber Brown

COMPLETED PAVEMENT
Thickness Determination

Concrete slab thickness plays a critical role in the performance of concrete pavements. A small deficit in
slab thickness can significantly reduce the service life of a concrete pavement. Based on the structural design
procedures for concrete pavements, a reduction in concrete slab thickness by an inch (2.54 cm) can result in as
much as a 50 percent reduction in the service life of the pavement.

Thickness Determination Techniques:

1.Core Boring

For most highway agencies, ASTM C 174 (ASTM 2006a), “Standard Test Method for Measuring Thickness
of Concrete Elements Using Drilled Concrete Cores,” is the standard method to determine the thickness of as
constructed concrete pavement. A process specifically designed to remove a cylinder of material, much like a
hole saw. The material left inside the drill bit is referred to as the core. The standard core sample diameter for
purposes of this test procedure will be 101.6 mm or 152.4 mm. Generally, the maximum thickness of asphalt
concrete pavement to be sampled will be 250 mm. After the drilling process is done, the height of the cylindrical
sample will be measured.

Page 96 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

2.Impact-Echo Method

A non-destructive test available for measuring concrete pavement thickness, such as the ASTM C 1383,
“Standard Test Method for Measuring the P-Wave Speed and the Thickness of Concrete Plates Using the Impact
Echo Method” (ASTM 2006c). One of the most suitable non-destructive test methods that may be used on
concrete for thickness determination or for investigation of possible delamination in the internal parts of a
concrete structure without damaging the surface. This method may be used to locate internal cracks or large air
voids existing in concrete. It is known that impact-echo has been used successfully on structures with varying
geometries and various purposes such as evaluation of concrete pavements, retaining walls and other reinforced
concrete sections. Besides the investigation of the internal state, it may also be used when the other side of the
section cannot be reached, as in the case of concrete pavements, in order to find the thickness of the section. This
is especially important for quality control and for cost calculations.

Page 97 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

3.Magnetic imaging tomography

It uses MIT-SCAN-T2 device—simple and easy-to-use handheld device that is able to accurately measure
the thickness of pavement layers. The coil mounted in the device generates a pulse of magnetic field, which
induces an eddy current in a pre-placed metal reflector on the surface of the base. Electromagnetic sensors in the
device then measure the intensity of the magnetic field caused by the eddy current in the reflector.

Page 98 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

This technique is medium-independent and can be used to measure concrete thickness of up to 508 mm
(20 in.). Using only one hand, the operator uses the device to locate reflectors that have been pre-placed
randomly on the base. The device is then used to measure and record the thickness of the pavement above the
reflector. Each test requires less than a minute to perform.

STANDARD PAVEMENT THICKNESS AS SET BY


DPWH

Portland cement Concrete Pavement (PCCP)

• For new road construction, rehabilitation or upgrading, the minimum thickness of the pavement shall be
280 mm. However, a thickness of less than 280 mm.
• For pavement rehabilitation using the crack and seat method, a minimum thickness of 260 mm. shall be
adopted for the new pavement that will be constructed on top of the deteriorated concrete pavement.
Page 99 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

• For pavement reblocking, the thickness of the new pavement shall be the same as the replaced blocks.

Asphalt Pavement

• For overlaying works, the minimum thickness of the overlay shall be 50 mm.
• On grounds of economy, pavement thickness of more than 50 mm. shall be considered only if the cost of
the asphalt pavement of such thickness is less than the cost of a 230 mm. thick PCCP.

SIGNIFICANCE OF PAVEMENT THICKNESS DETERMINATION

1. Thickness determination of completed pavement enable engineers to compare the actual thickness of
pavement to the proposed thickness as specified in the construction plan.

2. Pavement thickness was design considering many factors such as traffic and types of vehicles using the
road in a certain area. Thus, information on the actual thickness of the road will determine its capacity or
serviceability.

3. Core boring test are done to ensure that completed pavement followed the standard thickness prescribed
by the Philippine government. This will be the basis whether the road will be open for use of the public
or be removed and reconstructed.

Self-Help: You can also refer to the sources below to help you further understand the lesson:

Kultermann E. and Spence, William. (2017). Construction Materials, Methods, and


Techniques: Building a sustainable future. 4th Edition. Australia: Cencage Learning

Ahmed, A. and Sturges, J. (2015). Materials science in construction: an introduction.


Abingdon, Oxon; New York, NY: Routledge

Let’s Check Activity 1. Now that you know some types and properties of common construction
materials let us try to check how far you had learned. In the space provided, write the term/s
being asked in the following statements
_______________1. This test is performed to determine the setting time of hydraulic cement by mean of manually
operated standard.

_______________2. . It is obtained by mixing calcining bauxite and ordinary lime with clinker during the
manufacture of OPC.

_________________ 3. What is the Initial Setting Time and Final Setting Time for Rapid Hardening Cement?

_________________ 4. It refers to the ease of placement and compaction of a concrete mix.


________________ 5. Concrete grades are denoted by M10, M20, M30, according to their compressive strength.
The “M” denotes _____ design of concrete followed by the compressive strength number in N/mm2.

Page 100 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

________________ 6. A general purpose Portland cement used whenever other special properties are not
necessary. It is used for pavements, sidewalks, reinforced, concrete structural members, bridges, tanks, water
pipes, and masonry building units, among other components.

________________ 7. It tests the ability of unreinforced concrete beam or slab to withstand failure in bending.
_________________ 8. The compressive strength of normal-weight concrete is between ___ to ___.

_________________ 9. Is a process designed to remove a cylinder of a material, much like a hole saw for the
purpose of evaluating the thickness of a completed pavement.
________________ 10. These admixtures are used to purposely introduce and stabilize microscopic air bubbles
in concrete.
Let’s Analyze
Activity 1. Getting acquainted with the types and properties of some common and advanced
construction materials. what also matters is you should also be able to explain some its
properties. Now, choose 5 most important properties of concrete which you believe are essential
in determining its suitability for intended used in construction. Why?
Activity 2. Why Normal Consistency test is necessary to be conducted for cement?

In a Nutshell

Activity 1. The study of types and properties of construction materials is indeed pre-requisite to
becoming an engineer.

Based on the topics presented and learning exercises that you have done, please feel free to write
advantages of concrete as construction materials. I have indicated what I had learned.

1. Ingredients of concrete are easily available in most of the places.


2. Unlike natural stones, concrete is free from defects and laws.

Now it’s your turn.

3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.
9.

Q&A List

Page 101 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Do you have any question for clarification?

Questions/Issues Answers

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Keywords Index
cement concrete admixture mortar

icat workability tensile strength flexural strength


shear strength

STANDARD EXPERIMENTS

Refer to Laboratory Manual


Experiment numbers 12 – 20

Week 6 to 7: Unit Learning Outcomes (ULO 3): At the end of the unit, you are expected to:

a. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the properties and behaviors of most common and
advance construction material such as metals and wood.
b. Conduct/Familiarize the methods, procedures and formulas of different experiments on common
construction materials according to international standards such as ASTM & AASTHO.

Big Picture in Focus

ULO 3 a. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the properties and behaviors of


most common and advance construction material such as metals and wood.

Metalanguage
This section deals with the study of different types and properties of construction materials such as
metals and wood.
Please proceed immediately to the “Essential Knowledge.

Essential Knowledge
Page 102 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

To perform the aforesaid big picture (unit learning outcomes) for the first three (3) weeks of the course,
you need to fully understand the following essential knowledge that will be laid down in the succeeding
pages. Please note that you are not limited to exclusively refer to these resources. Thus, you are expected
to utilize other books, research articles and other resources that are available in the university’s library
e.g. ebrary, search.proquest.com etc.
INTROCTION: METALS & WOODS

WROUGHT IRON, CAST IRON, STEEL AND ALLOYS


Metals are any chemical element having "metallic properties". It is a solid material that is typically hard,
shiny, malleable, fusible, and ductile, with good electrical and thermal conductivity. Metals are refined from ores
that have been extracted from the earth. Metals is one of the four broad categories of construction materials. Due
to the addition of a mixture of materials, metals have a wide variation in properties.

❖ PROPERTIES OF METALS
◼ Luster: Metals are shiny when cut, scratched, or polished.
◼ Malleability: Metals are strong but malleable, which means that they can be easily bent or shaped.
◼ Conductivity: Metals are excellent conductors of electricity and heat. Because they are also ductile, they
are ideal for electrical wiring.
◼ High melting point: Most metals have high melting points and all except mercury are solid at room
temperature.
◼ Sonorous: Metals often make a ringing sound when hit.
◼ Reactivity: Some metals will undergo a chemical change (reaction), by themselves or with other
elements, and release energy. These metals are never found in a pure form, and are difficult to separate
from the minerals they are found in. Other metals don’t react at all with other metals. This means they
can be found in a pure form (examples are gold and platinum). Because copper is relatively inexpensive
and has a low reactivity, it’s useful for making pipes and wiring.

❖ CLASSIFICATION OF METALS
1. FERROUS METALS

Ferrous metals are those in which the chief ingredient is the chemical element iron
(ferrum). Iron (chemical symbol Fe), mixed with other minerals, is found in large
quantities in the earth’s crust. Iron is a shiny, grayish metal that rusts in damp air. It is the
most abundant of all metals, its pure form rapidly corrodes from exposure to moist air and
high temperatures.To be useful, iron must be extracted from mined ore, have impurities
removed and ingredients added to alter its properties, and then be formed into usable
products.

Ferrous metal products are widely used in the construction industry. They are a major construction material.
For commercial purposes, iron must have alloying elements added to improve its characteristics.
Annealing is the process of heating iron and allowing it to cool slowly - hardening process.
Page 103 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Pig iron is the starting point for commercial iron products. Iron ore is converted into pig iron in a blast furnace.
It contains 3 to 5 percent carbon and traces of other elements, such as manganese, sulfur, silicon, and phosphorus.
Blast furnace separates the iron from the waste materials and sinters the ore and flue dust.
Smelting is a process in which the ore is heated, permitting the iron to be separated from impurities that may be
chemically or physically mixed in.

Reduction is a process that separates the iron from oxygen with which it is chemically mixed.

2. WROUGHT IRON
Wrought iron is the iron containing almost no carbon. It is a mixture of less than 0.3% or ideally less than
0.1% carbon iron and 1 or 2 percent amount of slag. It is soft, tough, and ductile (easily worked). It can be heated
and reheated and worked into various shapes.

Although wrought iron exhibits properties that are not found in other forms of ferrous metal, it lacks the
carbon content necessary for hardening through heat treatment. Wrought iron may be welded in the same
manner as mild steel, but the presence of oxides or inclusions will provide defective results.

Chemical Composition
Element Content (%)

Iron, Fe 99-99.8

Carbon, C 0.05-0.25

Phosphorus, P 0.05-0.2

Silicon, Si 0.02-0.2

Sulfur, S 0.02-0.1

Manganese, Mn 0.01-0.1

Physical Properties
Properties Metric Imperial

Density 7.7 g/cm3 0.278 lb/in3

Melting point 1540°C 2800°F

Mechanical Properties
Properties Metric Imperial

Tensile strength 234-372 MPa 34000-54000 psi

Yield strength 159-221 MPa 23000-32000 psi

Page 104 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Modulus of elasticity 193100 MPa 28000 ksi

Applications of Wrought Iron

• Decorative items such as railings, outdoor stairs, fences and gates


• Nuts and bolts
• Handrails

3. CAST IRON
Cast irons have carbon contents above 1.7 percent having white, gray,
and malleable types. Cast iron is obtained from the pig-iron which is re-melted
with coke and limestone. Cast iron has lot of engineering properties so, that it can
be used in many ways like for sanitary fittings, rail chairs, casting molds.

Properties of Cast Iron

• Good corrosion resistance, so it can be used for water carrying pipes.


• Does not get attracted to magnet.
• Specific gravity is 7.5.
• Melting point is about 1250oC.
• Tensile strength is about 150 N/mm2 and compressive strength is about 600 N/mm2.so, it is good in
compression.
• It becomes soft when placed in salt water and it shrinks on cooling.
• It cannot be useful for forging work because of lack of plasticity.

Types of Cast Iron

Grey Cast Iron - as the name suggests, it is grey in color. It has coarse crystalline structure. Its melting point is
very low thus it has weak strength and it is only used for casting purposes.

Page 105 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Malleable Cast Iron - is a type of material that has the ability to form into any shape without breaking or
cracking. It has good corrosive resistance. Its manufacturing process involves two steps. In the first step, it is
casted and cooled as ordinary cast iron and then again it is heated to 1050oC and soaked in water for long period
(several hours or days). Hence, carbon content is slightly reduced and graphite content is precipitated as temper
carbon. This reduce the brittleness of cast iron. So, it can be worked easily using machines. It is used for making
pipe fittings, fastenings, automobiles etc.

Mottled Cast Iron - is the medium stage cast iron which properties are in between grey cast iron and white cast
iron. It has Small amount of graphite in its composition. So, mottled type fractures are developed in its micro
structure.

Toughened Cast Iron

Toughened cast iron is the combination of cast iron and wrought iron. To obtain this wrought iron scrap and cast
iron melted together. The composition of wrought iron is about 0.15 to 0.25
weight of the cast iron.

White Cast Iron - is silver in color. Its melting point is high so, strength wise it
is better but not used for delicate casting purposes. Because of its heavy
strength, it cannot be used easily.

Ductile Cast Iron- is also called as spheroidal graphite iron. Its


manufacturing process is very easy compared to other types.

Its manufacturing process consists manganese treatment which helps to


increase the carbon content and opposes the formation of graphite in flaky
form. It has very good engineering properties than malleable cast iron.

Ductile cast iron has very good corrosion resistance, high strength
and durability. So, usage of ductile iron dominates the other types. It is used
for making sewer pipes, water conveying pipes etc.

Chilled Cast Iron- consists two layers of which one layer has white cast iron properties and other one has grey
cast iron properties. This type of iron is used for casting process in which grey cast iron layer is provided in inner
surface and white cast iron layer is provided as outer surface. Hence the casting molds serve longer. Machine
parts are also made using chilled cast iron.

4. STEEL

Page 106 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Steel, the world's foremost construction material, is an iron alloy that contains between 0.2% and 2% carbon
by weight and sometimes small amounts of other elements, including manganese.
Steel specified for structural purposes is of major importance to architects and engineers. It has low-to-
medium carbon content. The American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) publication Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges includes requirements that must be specified in construction documents,
including columns, beams, trusses, bearing plates, and various fastening devices and connectors. The AISC
publication Specification for Structural Steel Buildings details information on structural steels for use in building
construction.

Structural steels fall into four major classifications:

1. Carbon steel (ASTM A36, A529, UNS K02600)


2. Heat-treated construction alloy steel (ASTM A514,

UNS K11630)
3. Heat-
treated high-
strength
carbon steel
(ASTM A633,
A678, A852,
UNS K01803,
K01600,
K12043)
4. 4. High-
strength low-
alloy steel
(ASTM A242,
A572, A588
UNS K11510,
K02303,
K11430)

⚫ Carbon steels must meet maximum content requirements for manganese and silicon. Copper requirements
have minimum and maximum specifications. There are no other minimums specified for other alloying
elements.
⚫ Heat-treated construction alloy steels have more stringent alloying element specifications than carbon
steel. They produce the strongest general-use structural steel.
⚫ Heat-treated high-strength carbon steels are brought to desired strength and toughness levels by heat-
treating. Heat-treating refers to the process of heating and cooling metals to produce changes in the physical
and mechanical properties.
⚫ High-strength low-alloy steels are a group of steels to which alloying elements have been added to produce
improved mechanical properties and greater resistance to atmospheric corrosion. Their carbon range is
typically from 0.12 to 0.22 percent.
Page 107 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Commercial steels are also generally classified into four groups that differ according to their metal alloy
content and end-use applications:

1. Carbon steels include low carbon (less than 0.3% carbon), medium carbon (as much as 0.6% carbon), high
carbon (as much as 1% carbon), and ultra-high-carbon (as much as 2% carbon) steels.

• Low carbon steel is the most common and the weakest of the three types. It's available in a wide array
of shapes, including sheets and beams. The higher the carbon content, the more difficult the steel is to work
with.
• High carbon and ultra-high-carbon steels are used in cutting tools, radiators, punches, and wires.

2. Alloy steels contain other metals such as aluminum, copper, or nickel. They may be used in auto parts,
pipelines, and motors.

3. Stainless steels always contain chromium and maybe also nickel or molybdenum. They are shiny and
generally resistant to corrosion.

Types of stainless steel

✓ Ferritic- which is similar to carbon steel and strongly resistant to stress corrosion cracking but is not good
for welding.
✓ Austenitic- which is the most common and good for welding
✓ Martensitic- which is moderately resistant to
corrosion but high in strength.
✓ Duplex- which consists of half ferritic and half
austenitic steels and is stronger than either of those two
types. Because stainless steels are easily sterilized, they
are often used in medical equipment and instruments
and food production equipment.

4. Tool steels are alloyed with hard metals such as


vanadium, cobalt, molybdenum, and tungsten. As their
name suggests, they are often used to make tools,
including hammers.

Structural Steel Shapes

⚫ W-shape (wide flange) / W 16 3 31 indicates a


W-shape with a web 16 inches deep and a weight of 31
pounds per linear foot. The W-shape has parallel inner
and outer flange surfaces with a consistent thickness. The most widely used structural steel member is the
W-shape, whose cross-section forms the letter H. It is designed so that its flanges provide strength in a
horizontal plane, while the web gives strength in a vertical plane. W-shapes are used as beams, columns,
truss members, and in other load-bearing applications.

Page 108 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

⚫ S-shape (American Standard I-beam) has a slope of approximately 17 degrees on the inner flange surfaces.
It is distinguished by its cross-section being shaped like the letter I. S-shapes are used less frequently than
are W-shapes, since the S-shapes provide less strength.
⚫ C-shape (American Standard channel) is similar to the S-shape in that its inner flange surface is also
sloped. It is called the American Standard channel and has a cross-section similar to the letter C. It is
especially useful in locations where a single flat face without a flange on one side is required. The C-shape is
not very efficient for a beam or column when used alone, but can be efficiently built up of channels welded
together with other structural shapes.

⚫ The bearing pile, or HP-shape, is almost identical to the W-shape except that the flange thickness and web
thickness of the bearing pile are equal, whereas the W-shape has different web and flange thicknesses.

⚫ Steel angle is a structural shape whose cross-section resembles the letter L. Angles are available in an equal
leg angle and an unequal leg angle. The angle is identified by the length and thickness of its legs; for example,
8 in. 3 6 in. 3 1/2 in. When an angle has unequal legs, the dimension of the wider leg is given first. The third
dimension applies to the thickness of the legs, which always have equal thickness.

⚫ Structural tees have a cross-section that resembles the letter T. They are produced by splitting the webs of
beams with rotary shears. Structural tees are designated by their depth and weight per liner foot.

⚫ Steel pipe and structural tubing are available in square, rectangular, and circular shapes and are
commonly used for columns and other load-bearing applications. They are designated by their cross-
sectional dimensions.

⚫ Steel plate is a structural shape whose cross-section is in the form of a flat rectangle that has a width of
greater than 8 in. and a thickness of 1/4 in. or greater. Plates frequently are referred to by their thickness
and width in inches, as plate 1/2 in. 3 24 in. Plates are frequently used to make connections between other
structural members or as component parts of built-up structural members.

NONFERROUS METALS

Nonferrous metals are those containing little or no iron. In other words, all metals other than
iron and steel are nonferrous. Nonferrous metals commonly found in construction include aluminum, copper,
lead, tin, and zinc.

1. ALUMINUM

Page 109 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Aluminum (chemical symbol Al) is a versatile material used widely in


building, and the construction industry is one of its largest consumers.
Aluminum is lightweight, having a specific gravity of only 2.7 times that of
water and approximately one-third that of steel. For many products, aluminum
must have alloying elements added to alter its physical properties. The major
alloying elements added to aluminum are manganese, copper, magnesium,
silicon, and zinc.

Properties:

⚫ Pure aluminum melts at 1,220°F (665°C), considerably lower than the melting point of other structural
metals. It also is relatively weak as far as mechanical properties are concerned.
⚫ Aluminum elastically deforms about three times more than steel under comparable loading.
⚫ It can be strengthened by alloying, cold working, or strain hardening.
⚫ Aluminum alloys do not lose ductility or become brittle at cryogenic (low) temperatures.
⚫ Aluminum is a good conductor of electricity. Compared to copper wire of the same diameter, aluminum’s
conductivity is roughly 65 percent that of copper.
⚫ Aluminum Alloys is relatively soft and ductile and has a tensile strength of around 7,000 psi (48,258 kPa).
Aluminum alloys classifications:
1. Wrought alloys are those that are mechanically worked by processes, such as forging, drawing, extruding, or
rolling, to form sheet material.
2. Cast alloys are those used to produce a product for which the molten metal is cast in a finished shape, such as
a grille, in a sand mold or permanent mold.

2.COPPER

Copper (chemical symbol Cu) is a nonmagnetic


reddishbrown metal with excellent electrical and
thermal conductivity.

Properties:

⚫ Copper has the highest conductivity properties of all commonly used metals
except silver.
⚫ It is ductile, malleable, and easily worked.
⚫ When alloyed, it offers a wide range of properties suitable for a variety of construction applications.
⚫ High resistance to corrosion, wear defiance makes it ideal for plumbing pipe, gas lines, and components
exposed to the atmosphere or corrosive chemical elements.

Page 110 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

⚫ Its ductility properties make it a material easily bent, stretched, stamped, machined, and otherwise formed
into useful products.
⚫ Copper has a relatively low tensile strength, about 32,000 psi, which can be improved by heat-treating, cold-
working, and alloying.
⚫ Copper has a melting point of 1,981°F (1,083°C) and a coefficient of thermal expansion of 0.0000168/°F
(0.0000093/°C).
Uses of Copper and Copper Alloys

⚫ Copper are excellent for outdoor uses, such as siding, roofing, flashing, guttering, and screen wire.
⚫ Copper Alloys are used extensively for plumbing pipe in residential and commercial structures and in the
manufacture of plumbing fittings, such as valves, drains, and faucets.
⚫ Sewage treatment plants and industrial plants, such as chemical processing installations, utilize copper for
many purposes, including lining vessels that contain corrosive materials.
⚫ Various types of hardware and fasteners, such as nails, screws, and bolts, are made from copper alloys.

3.LEAD

Lead (chemical symbol Pb) is a soft, heavy metal with good


corrosion resistance that is easily worked. Its ability to resist
penetration from radiation is a unique feature.

Properties of Lead
⚫ Lead has high density and weight.
⚫ Lead is usually soft and malleable.
⚫ Lead has low melting point (620°F; 327°C)
⚫ Lead has a good electrical conductivity.
⚫ Lead has low strength and lack of elasticity.
Uses of Lead

• Lead pipes and tank liners are used in installations that process highly corrosive materials, but they are
never used for piping to carry drinking water.
• Lead is a good self-lubricant, it is used when high-pressure lubricating is necessary.
• Lead solder works for electrical connections because it is a good conductor, but it is not used on water
pipe connections.
• Lead pipe and lead-lined tanks have high corrosion resistance and can find use in industrial production
applications, such as in the chemical manufacturing industry.
• Sheet lead is used for roofing, flashing, and spandrels in areas where there is severe industrial air
contamination or on seacoasts.
Page 111 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

4.ZINC
Zinc (chemical symbol Zn) is a bluish-white metal that is brittle and has low strength. It is often referred to as
a white metal and is widely used as a protective coating over steel to prevent corrosion.

Properties
⚫ Zinc has low strength and is brittle.
⚫ Zinc has a low melting point of 787°F (419°C).
⚫ It is also subject to creep, a permanent dimensional deformation over time.
⚫ Its tensile strength can be greatly increased by cold-working and alloying.
⚫ It can be hot and cold rolled, drawn, extruded, cast, and machined.
⚫ It can be joined by welding, soldering, and various mechanical fasteners.
Uses of Zinc
• Zinc as the main agent for galvanizing - forming a protective coating over steel to prevent rust.
• Zinc are used for some types of hardware and plumbing items. They are usually die cast and finished by
polishing or plating with chromium, brass, or other materials.
• Zinc also finds use as an alloying element in brasses.
• Various zinc compounds serve in the production of paper, plastics, ceramics, rubber, abrasives, paint, and
other products.
• Zinc is also used for specialized products in which corrosion resistance is important, such as anchors,
flashing, screws, nails, expansion joints, and corner beads.
• Solid zinc strip material is used to produce a wide range of
products, such as low-voltage buss bars, cavity wall ties, electric
cable binders, electric motor covers, grading screens, and roofing
and fascia material.

QUALITY TEST FOR BENDING, TENSION AND CHEMICAL


ANALYSIS

Terminology
Stress
Stress is the ratio of applied force F to a cross section area - defined as "force per unit area".

Page 112 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

• Tensile stress - stress that tends to stretch or lengthen the material - acts normal to the stressed area
• Compressive stress - stress that tends to compress or shorten the material - acts normal to the stressed
area
• Shearing stress - stress that tends to shear the material - acts in plane to the stressed area at right-angles
to compressive or tensile stress

Strain (Deformation)
Strain is defined as "deformation of a solid due to stress".

• Normal strain - elongation or contraction of a line segment


• Shear strain - change in angle between two line segments originally perpendicular

Hooke's Law

Most metals deform proportional to imposed load over a range of loads. Stress is proportional to load
and strain is proportional to deformation as expressed with Hooke's Law.

Bending Strength / Flexural Strength

Page 113 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

-Is defined as its ability to resist deformation under load.

Tensile Strength
- is the ability to undergo a great deal of force without breaking or deforming. This is due to a mixture of
strength and flexibility.

“Standard Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials”


REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM E8/ E8M – 13a
Suppose that a metal specimen be placed in tension-compression-testing machine. As the axial load is
gradually increased in increments, the total elongation over the gauge length is measured at each increment of
the load and this is continued until failure of the specimen takes p3lace. Knowing the original cross-sectional

Page 114 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

area and length of the specimen, the normal stress σ and the strain ε can be obtained. The graph of these
quantities with the stress σ along the y-axis and the strain ε along the x-axis is called the stress-strain diagram.
The stress-strain diagram differs in form for various materials. The diagram shown below is that for a medium-
carbon structural steel.
Metallic engineering materials are classified as either ductile or ductile materials. A ductile material is
one having relatively large tensile strains up to the point of rupture like structural steel and aluminum, whereas
brittle materials has a relatively small strain up to the point of rupture like cast iron and concrete. An arbitrary
strain of 0.05 mm/mm is frequently taken as the dividing line between these two classes.

ASTM E8 describes tensile testing of metals such as steel or metal alloys. These test methods cover the
tension testing of metallic materials in any form at room temperature, specifically, the methods of determination
of yield strength, yield point elongation, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area, modulus of elasticity
and, rupture strength.

Proportional Limit (Hooke's Law)


From the origin O to the point P called proportional limit, the stress-strain curve is a straight line. This
linear relation between elongation and the axial force causing was first noticed by Sir Robert Hooke in 1678 and
is called Hooke's Law that within the proportional limit, the stress is directly proportional to strain.
Elastic Limit
The elastic limit is the limit beyond which the material will no longer go back to its original shape when
the load is removed, or it is the maximum stress that may developed such that there is no permanent or residual
deformation when the load is entirely removed.
Elastic and Plastic Ranges
The region in stress-strain diagram from O to P is called the elastic range. The region from P to R is called
the plastic range.
Yield Point
Yield point is the point at which the material will have an appreciable elongation or yielding without any
increase in load.

Page 115 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Ultimate Strength
The maximum ordinate in the stress-strain diagram is the ultimate strength or tensile strength.
Rapture Strength
Rapture strength is the strength of the material at rupture. This is also known as the breaking strength.
Significance and Use:
Tension tests provide information on the strength and ductility of materials under uniaxial tensile
stresses. This information may be useful in comparisons of materials, alloy development, quality control, and
design under certain circumstances.
Apparatus:

• Universal (Hydraulic) Testing Machine is capable of applying tensile load at a controlled rate of
deformation or load.
• A gripping device, used to transmit the load from the testing machine to the test.
• An extensometer, used to measure the deformation of the specimen.
• Caliper used to measure the dimensions of the specimen.

Test Procedure:

1. Measure and record the specimen dimensions necessary to determine the cross sectional area at its
smallest point. The original cross sectional area is used for all engineering stress calculations.

2. Use ink and a scribe or punch to place gauge marks on the test specimen at the appropriate gauge length.
The distance between the gaue marks after the specimen is broken is used to determine the percent
elongation at break. Note: To accurately compare elongation values between tests, the gauge lengths must
be the same.

3. Zero the testing machine without the specimen inserted in the grips. Then install the specimen in the
grips and start loading the sample. The speed of testing is generally specified in one of three manners: a)
the rate of straining of the specimen (0.5 in/in of the gauge length per minute ;) b) the rate of stressing
of the specimen; or c) the rate of separation of the crossheads. In addition, the test rate is to remain
Page 116 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

constant through yield but can then be increased when determining ultimate tensile strength and
elongation at break.

4. Run the test until specimen failure or fracture. Remove the broken sample from the machine and fit the
fractured ends together. Measure the distance between the gage marks to the nearest 0.05 millimeters.\

Analysis and Results:

• Plot the stress versus strain curve.


• Determining the yield strength using offset method
• Determining the modulus of elasticity using Hooke’s law.

σ=Eε
where:
E = Modulus of elasticity
σ = stress in proportional limit
ε = corresponding strain, mm/mm (in/in)
• Calculate the tensile strength

where:
σ = tensile strength/ ultimate strength, in MPa (psi)
Pmax = maximum load carried by the specimen during tension test, N (lb)\
A = original cross- sectional area of the specimen, mm² (in².)

• Calculate the elongation

Percent elongation = [ (Ls-Lo)/Lo) x 100]


Where:
Ls= gauge length after rupture, mm (in.)
Lo= original gauge length, mm (in.)
For elongation > 3.0%, fit the ends of the fractured specimen together and measure Ls as the distance
between two gauge marks. For elongation ≤ 3.0%, fit the fractured ends together and apply an end load along the
axis of the specimen sufficient to close the fractured ends together, then measure Ls as the distance between
gauge marks.

• Calculate the rupture strength

Where:
= rupture strength, MPa (psi)
Pf = final load, N (lb)

Page 117 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

A = original cross- sectional area of the specimen, mm² (in².)


• Calculate the reduction of cross-sectional area

Percent reduction in cross- sectional area = [ (Ao – As)/Ao ) x 100 ]


Where:
Ao = original cross- sectional area of the specimen, mm² (in².)
As = cross-sectional area after rupture, mm² (in².)
Replacement of the Specimen:
The test specimen should be replace if
▪ the original specimen had wrong dimensions
▪ the test procedure was incorrect
▪ the fracture was outside the gauge length
▪ for elongation determination, the fracture was outside the middle half of the gauge length.

Example:
The following data were obtained during a tension test of an aluminum alloy. The initial diameter of the test
specimen was 0.505 in. and the gage length was 2.0 in.

Load (lb) Elongation (in.) Load (lb) Elongation (in.)


0 0 14 000 0.020
2 310 0.00220 14 400 0.025
4 640 0.00440 14 500 0.060
6 950 0.00660 14 600 0.080
9 290 0.00880 14 800 0.100
11 600 0.0110 14 600 0.120
12 600 0.0150 13 600 Fracture

Plot the stress-strain diagram and determine the following mechanical properties: (a) proportional limit; (b)
modulus of elasticity; (c) yield point; (d) yield strength at 0.2% offset; (e) ultimate strength; and (f) rupture
strength.
Area, A = 0.25π(0.5052) = 0.0638π in2
Length, L = 2 in
Strain = Elongation/Length
Stress = Load/Area

Load (lb) Elongation (in.) Strain (in/in) Stress (psi)


0 0 0 0
2 310 0.0022 0.0011 11 532.92
4 640 0.0044 0.0022 23 165.70

Page 118 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

6 950 0.0066 0.0033 34 698.62


9 290 0.0088 0.0044 46 381.32
11 600 0.011 0.0055 57 914.24
12 600 0.015 0.0075 62 906.85
14 000 0.02 0.01 69 896.49
14 400 0.025 0.0125 71 893.54
14 500 0.06 0.03 72 392.80
14 600 0.08 0.04 72 892.06
14 800 0.1 0.05 73 890.58
14 600 0.12 0.06 72 892.06
13 600 Fracture 67 899.45

From stress-strain diagram:


a. Proportional Limit = 57,914.24 psi
b. Modulus of Elasticity:
E = 57914.24/0.0055 = 10,529,861.82 psi
E = 10,529.86 ksi
c. Yield Point = 69,896.49 psi
d. Yield Strength at 0.2% Offset:
Strain of Elastic Limit = ε at PL + 0.002
Strain of Elastic Limit = 0.0055 + 0.002
Strain of Elastic Limit = 0.0075 in/in

The offset line will pass through Q (See figure below):

Page 119 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Slope of 0.2% offset = E = 10,529,861.82 psi

Test for location:


slope = rise / run
10,529,861.82 = (6989.64 + 4992.61) / run
run = 0.00113793
Slope of EL to YP
σ1 / ε1 = 6989.64/0.0025
σ1 / ε1 = 2 795 856
ε1 = σ1 / 2 795 856

For the required point:


E = (4992.61 + σ1) / ε1
10 529 861.82 = (4992.61 + σ1) / (σ1 / 2 795 856)
3.7662 σ1 = 4992.61 + σ1
σ1 = 1804.84 psi

Yield Strength at 0.2% Offset


= EL + σ1
= 62906.85 + 1804.84
= 64 711.69 psi
e. Ultimate Strength = 73 890.58 psi
f. Rupture Strength = 67 899.45 psi

“Standard Test Methods for Bend Testing of Material for Ductility”


“Guided Bend”
REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM E290-14
Forces and couples acting on the materials (metals) cause bending (flexural stresses) and shearing
stresses on any cross section of the materials (metals) and deflection perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
the materials (metals). Bend test machines are typically universal testing machines specifically configured to
evaluate material ductility, bend strength, fracture strength, and resistance to fracture.
These test methods cover bend testing for ductility of materials were a guided-bend test using a mandrel
or plunger of defined dimensions to force the mid-length of the specimen between two supports separated by a
defined space.
Page 120 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

After bending, the convex surface of the bend is examined for evidence of a crack or surface irregularities.
If the specimen fractures, the material has failed the test. When complete fracture does not occur, the criterion
for failure is the number and size of cracks or surface irregularities visible to the unaided eye occurring on the
convex surface of the specimen after bending, as specified by the product standard. Any cracks within one
thickness of the edge of the specimen are not considered a bend test failure. Cracks occurring in the corners of
the bent portion shall not be considered significant unless they exceed the size specified for corner cracks in the
product standard.
Significance and Use:
Bend tests for ductility provide a simple way to evaluate the quality of materials by their ability to resist
cracking or other surface irregularities during one continuous bend. No reversal of the bend force shall be
employed when conducting these tests.

Apparatus:

300 Series Electromechanical Universal Test Machines


Force range of 5 kN to 600 kN (1,125 lbf to 135,000 lbf)
The most popular choice for static tension and compression tests,
these dual column testers are available in both tabletop and floor
standing models

600 Series Universal Test Machines


Force range of 300 kN to 2,000 kN (67,500 lbf to 450,000 lbf)

The best choice for performing static tension and/or


compression applications when force capacities of 300 kN
(67,000 lbf) or more are needed
Includes its own grips

ASTM E290 Guided Bend Weld Test Fixture


are used to convert the axial motion or rotary motion of
the ELF and Instron fatigue testers into various forms of bending
motion or motions that combine bending and other motion

PLUNGER OR MANDREL
Page 121 of 208
A plunger forces the specimen into a 180° bend against
rollers on a base
Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Test Procedure:
1. Place the specimen over two rounded supports separated by a clearance (C) equal to (2r + 3t), 6 (t/2),
where (r) is the radius of the plunger or mandrel and (t) is the specimen thickness.

Page 122 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

2. Bend the specimen by applying a force through a plunger or mandrel in contact with the specimen at the
mid-length between supports (C/2) on the opposite side of the specimen from the end supports. Apply
the bending force smoothly and without shock.
3. Continue bending until failure occurs, or until the specified angle of bend, or maximum angle for the
fixture is achieved. The angle of bend is measured while the specimen is under the bending force.
4. When the required angle cannot be achieved in the bend fixture shown in Fig. 3, complete the test by
pressing the specimen between suitable platens until the specified conditions of bend are obtained. Apply
the force smoothly, without shock. When it is desired not to exceed 180° of bend while completing the
bend, place between the two legs of the specimen a spacer having a thickness twice the required bend
radius,

Page 123 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Calculation:

• Compute for Bending Strength

Flexure Formula:

OR
Where:

fb = bending stress
Mmaxx = the largest bending moment of the specimen

C = is the distance the neutral axis to the outermost point of the section

E = modulus of elasticity of the specimen


R = Radius of Curvature a point to the neutral axis

Example:

Page 124 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

“Standard Test Methods for Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Carbon Steel, Low-Alloy
Steel, Silicon Chemical Analysis of Carbon Steel, Low-Alloy Steel, Silicon Electrical Steel, Ingot Iron, and
Wrought Iron”
REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM E350- 95

This test method covers the chemical analysis of carbon steels, low-alloy steels, silicon electrical steels,
ingot carbon steels, low-alloy steels, silicon electrical steels, ingot iron, and wrought iron having chemical
compositions within iron, and wrought iron having chemical compositions within the following limits:

Element Concentration Range, %

Aluminum 0.001 to 1.50


Antimony 0.002 to 0.03
Arsenic 0.0005 to 0.10

Page 125 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Bismuth 0.005 to 0.50

Boron 0.0005 to 0.02


Calcium 0.0005 to 0.01

Cerium 0.005 to 0.50

Chromium 0.005 to 3.99


Cobalt 0.01 to 0.30

Columbium (Niobium) 0.002 to 0.20


Copper 0.005 to 1.50

Lanthanum 0.001 to 0.50

Manganese 0.01 to 2.50


Molybdenum 0.002 to 1.50

Nickel 0.005 to 5.00


Nitrogen 0.0005 to 0.04

Oxygen 0.0001 to 0.03

Phosphorus 0.001 to 0.25


Selenium 0.001 to 0.50

Silicon 0.001 to 5.00


Sulfur 0.001 to 0.60

Tin 0.002 to 0.10


Titanium 0.002 to 0.20

Tungsten 0.005 to 0.10

Vanadium 0.005 to 0.50


Zirconium 0.005 to 0.15

Some of the concentration ranges are too broad to be covered by a single test method and therefore this
broad to be covered by a single test method and therefore this standard contains multiple test methods for some
elements. The user must select the proper test method by matching the information given in the Scope and
Interference sections of each test method with the composition of the alloy to be each test method with the
composition of the alloy to be analyzed.
Significance and Use:

• These test methods for the chemical analysis of metals and alloys are primarily intended as referee
methods to test such materials for compliance with compositional specifications, particularly those under

Page 126 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

the jurisdiction of ASTM Committees A-1 on Steel, Stainless Steel, and Related Alloys and A-4 on Iron
Castings. It is assumed that all who use these test methods will be trained analysts capable of performing
common laboratory procedures skillfully and safely. It is expected that work will be performed in a
properly equipped laboratory und under appropriate quality control practices.

REINFORCING STEEL

Most people are familiar with reinforcing steel, commonly called "rebar". It is used in bridges, buildings,
skyscrapers, homes, warehouses, and foundations to increase the strength of a concrete structure.
Rebar is used in concrete to provide additional strength, as concrete is weak in tension, while steel is
strong in both tension and compression. Steel and concrete have similar coefficients of thermal expansion, so a
concrete structural member reinforced with steel will experience minimal stress as the temperature changes.
Types of Steel Reinforcement
The steel reinforcement used in concrete construction is mainly of 4 types.
1. Hot Rolled Deformed Bars
Hot rolled deformed bars are most commonly used steel reinforcement for R.C.C structures. As the name says,
the hot rolling of the reinforcement is undergone leaving certain deformations on its surface in the form of ribs.
These ribs help to form a bond with the concrete. The typical yield strength of hot-rolled deformed bars is
60000psi.
2. Cold Worked Steel Bars

A cold worked reinforcement bar is obtained by letting the hot rolled steel bars to undergo cold
working. In the cold working process, the bars will undergo twisting and drawing. The process is performed
at room temperature. The cold worked steel bars do not undergo a plastic yield thus have less ductility when
compared with hot rolled bars.
3. Mild Steel Plain Bars

Page 127 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

The mild steel plain reinforcement bars do not have ribs on their surface. They have a plain surface.
These bars are used for small projects where the major concern is the economy. The tensile yield strength of
these bars has a value of 40000psi.
4. Prestressing Steel Bars

The prestressing steel reinforcement are steel bars used in the form of strands or tendons.
Multiple strands are employed in concrete in order to perform the prestressing action. The strands are
made of multiple wires either 2 or 3 or 7 wire strands. The wires used here are cold formed and have a
high tensile strength ranging from 250000 – 270000 psi. This high strength helps to effectively prestress
the concrete.
Need for Steel Reinforcement
Plain concrete is weak in tension and strong in compression. Tensile property for concrete structures is
obtained by incorporating steel reinforcement. The steel reinforcement is strong in both tension and
compression. The tensile property provided by the steel reinforcement will prevent and minimize concrete
cracks under tension loads.
The coefficient of thermal expansion of steel reinforcement and concrete are similar in that they undergo
similar expansions during temperature changes. This property will ensure that the concrete is subjected to
minimal stress during temperature variations. The surface of the steel reinforcement bars is patterned to have a
proper bond with the surrounding concrete material.
The two main factors that provide strength to the concrete structures are steel and concrete. The design
engineer will combine both the elements and design the structural element such a way that the steel resists the
induced tensile and shear force, while the concrete takes up the compressive forces.
Advantages of Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement is a reinforcing choice compared to other reinforcing materials due to its unique
advantages. They are:
• Compatibility with Concrete: The fresh concrete is placed on the formwork mold already prepared with
reinforcement. The steel reinforcement won’t float in concrete during the concrete placing procedure.
Hence, steel reinforcement does not demand special tying up with formworks.
• Robustness of Steel Reinforcement: The steel bars are robust in nature that they have the ability to
withstand the rigors, the wear and tear during the construction activities.
• Bent Property of Steel Reinforcement: The steel bars once manufactured to standard size, it can be bent
to the required specifications. Hence fabricated steel bars are delivered easily at the site.
• Recycling Property: The steel reinforced left over after the service life of a structure is recycled again and
used for new construction.
• Easily Available: Every region of a country will have a steel supplier or manufacturer. Hence steel
reinforcement is easily available.
Disadvantages of Steel Reinforcement
Page 128 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

The main disadvantages of steel reinforcement are mentioned below:


• Reactive Nature of Steel Reinforcement: In concrete structures where the cover is small and subjected to
external moisture and salt action, the reinforcement undergoes reaction and starts to corrode. These can
lessen the strength of concrete and finally to failure.
• Expensive: The cost of steel reinforcement in high. This will increase the cost of construction
• Melts at high temperature: At higher temperatures, the steel reinforcement may melt. This is the reason
why the steel reinforcement are tied up and not welded.
If reinforcing bars have been sitting on the jobsite for a while, and begin to show signs of rust, can they
still be used that way?
The answer is "yes," but with certain exceptions. There are a number of things that can get onto the
surface of rebar and affect the bond strength — the bond between the reinforcing bar and the concrete. These
include scale, rust, oil, and mud.
Scale is a material found normally on the bars that is produced at the time the bars are manufactured. It
results from the cooling of the hot metal. Loose scale is usually removed when the bars are handled at the
fabricating shop — or it falls off while it's being loaded, unloaded, or handled.
Rust actually improves bond because it increases the roughness of the surface. However — and this is the
exception — if there is so much rust that the weight of the bar is reduced OR the height of the deformations is
reduced to below that weight, area, or deformation required by the applicable ASTM, then the rust is considered
harmful.
If oil and grease gets onto the surface of the bar, it must be cleaned off. You can do this by wiping it off
with a solvent. And finally, mud. You should load and unload bars to avoid getting them covered with mud. Any
mud on the bars needs to be washed off before using the bars.
STEEL BARS

Steel reinforcing bars, also called as “rebars”, are used as a tension device for concrete construction. It
strengthens and aids the concrete under tension, since concrete is known to be strong under compression, yet
weak in its tensile strength.

Page 129 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Rebars are very essential for ensuring safe, durable structures that will be reliable for years. Having no
reinforced steel to aid, the natural expansion and contraction of the concrete will cause weak areas to develop,
which will ultimately collapse in the long run.

Rebars are hot-rolled in much same way as structural shapes. It has a round cross-sectional area. It
usually have deformations with ribs, lugs or indentations for better bonding with concrete, reduce risk of
slippage, and also for the increase of the tensile strength of a structure.

PRODUCTION OF REBARS

Page 130 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

1. Steel (carbon or alloy) is melted down to liquid form, which requires an extreme amount of heat to
achieve. Once melted, the liquid steel is pulled through small round openings to give the rebar its shape.

2. While unfinished steel is the cheapest form of rebar available, some jobs necessitate epoxy-coated or
stainless steel. The reason being is that rust can occur when the rebar has prolonged exposure to salt
water, which can ultimately lead to a build-up of internal pressure that can cause the concrete form to
crack. Since this is not a profitable or safe option in the long-term, most developers will opt to purchase
higher-grade material.

3. Once the steel has been properly shaped, the manufacturer will make the twists and grooves on the metal
to ensure it will stay firmly in place inside the structure.

4. Since these reinforced metal bars are highly hazardous when it comes to installation, their ends are often
covered with plastic caps to prevent accidental harm to construction workers.

5. Rebar is often distributed straight from the manufacturer to the job site, although contractors can arrange
for pickup if they need to. Once on site, the product will need to be bent to the proper specs. This is
accomplished with specialty hydraulic benders and cutters. Only certain types of rebar can be welded,
which is why many construction companies utilize wire and coupling splices to join the ends together.

I. BAR MARKINGS

There are many ways to identify reinforcing steel bar (rebar) from the production mill to the fabrication
shop to the jobsite. Some rebars have the same appearance that leads to some people finding it hard to identify
the rebar themselves, which may cause mistakes easily.

Engineers should have the knowledge about the manufacturing and composition of each bar of
reinforcing steel.

Page 131 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

❖ ASTM Rebar Markings:

Each individual reinforcing bar is manufactured with a series of individual markings:

▪ The first letter or symbol identifies the producing mill and its deformation pattern.

▪ The next marking is the bar size. It is about the bars' diameter and length.

▪ The third marking symbol designates the type of reinforcing steel ,usually either ;
• "S" for carbon-steel (ASTM A615)
• "W" for low-alloy steel (ASTM A706)
• "SS" for stainless steel (ASTM A955)
• "R" for rail-steel (ASTM A996)
• "I" for axle-steel (ASTM A996)
• "A" for rail-steel (ASTM A996)
• "CS" for low-carbon chromium (ASTM A1035)

▪ The last marking shows the grade of reinforcing bar ;


• 40: grade 40
• 60: grade 60
• 75: grade 75
• 4: grade 420, also grade 60
• 5: grade 520, also grade 75

Furthermore, the grade also can be identified by its additional lines, which must be at least five
deformations long. If it has no line, it means grade 40. If there is an addition of one line it represents grade 60, or
two lines grade 75, three lines grades 80 and 100, and four lines grade 120.

Page 132 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

II. BASIC PROPERTIES OF REINFORCED STEEL


Rebar, also known as reinforcement steel and reinforcing steel, is a steel bar or mesh of steel wires used
in reinforced concrete and masonry structures to strengthen and hold the concrete in tension. To improve the
quality of the bond with the concrete, the surface of rebar is often patterned.

❖ Different uses of rebar include:

▪ Primary reinforcement

▪ Secondary reinforcement

▪ Provide resistance to concentrated loads, spreading it through a wider area.

▪ Assist other steel bars in accommodating their loads by holding them in the correct position.

❖ The Properties of Reinforcing Steel are:

1. Strength
Page 133 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

The steel is strong as a material, due to uniform lattice structure at the atomic level.

2. Ductility

The ability of steel to be drawn into wires is quantitatively higher than other metals.

3. Malleability

The steel can readily be beaten into sheets due to the intrinsic property of the alloy due to its lattice
structure.

4. Weldability

Steel materials can easily be welded, as their melting temperature is within the limit of majority welders.

5. Durability

Steel products survive years of damage, wear and tear, and endure impacts before failures are observed.

6. Toughness

Steel as a material tough, making it resistant to sudden impact.

The rougher the surface of the steel, the better it adheres to concrete. Thus steel with a light, firm layer
of rust is superior to clean steel; however, steel with loose or scaly rust is inferior. Loose or scaly rust can be
removed from the steel by rubbing the steel with burlap or similar material. This action leaves only the firm layer
of rust on the steel to adhere to the concrete.

NOTE: Reinforcing steel must be strong in tension and, at the same time, be ductile enough to be shaped or bent
cold.

III. TENSILE TEST

Steel reinforcing bar, or rebar, is embedded in concrete to improve the overall strength of the concrete
that surrounds it. Material products standards exist to help ensure that rebar produced throughout the world
Page 134 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

exhibits the same physical, chemical, and mechanical properties regardless of the source. Proper mechanical
testing is then necessary for determining if the rebar meets its published specifications, ensuring the quality of
the product.

Mechanical testing requirements for rebar can vary, but typically fall into the following basic test
categories: Tensile Bend Compression Fatigue.

Equipment Considerations

❖ Universal (Hydraulic) Testing Machine

❖ Accommodating Bent Specimens

As the standards indicate, it is necessary to straighten rebar specimens prior to tensile testing. As a result,
many test pieces may still have a slight bend or non-linearity over their length. Therefore, it is best if the load
frame and grips are able to accommodate slightly bent specimens.

Uncoiled rebar exhibiting slight bends over length


Grips that mechanically clamp on center are recommended in order to maintain axial alignment of the
specimen. This helps improve alignment and eliminates the need to “reset” the grips between tests.

❖ Specimen Deformations and Scaling Grip

Page 135 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Jaws (faces) must accommodate the deformations and scale that is common on the surface of rebars
specimens. Build-up of scale in the teeth of the jaws can lead to specimen slippage. Tooth patterns that are too
aggressive can cause premature specimen failures and may also prevent the specimen halves from being easily
removed after the test. Therefore, tooth profiles should allow scale to fall away naturally or be easily brushed
away between tests. They should also alleviate the chance of failures that are caused by the grips. If the broken
specimen halves remain stuck in the jaw faces, the operator must dislodge them through use of a hammer or
other means. This can reduce efficiency and add to operator fatigue and frustration. The mechanical functions of
the grips should also be protected against the falling scale. If scale is allowed to get between moving parts, critical
surfaces can be galled and lead to poor performance or grip failure. It is important to regularly remove scale from
the testing equipment to help prevent unnecessary wear and tear.

❖ Violent Specimen Failures

Because rebar specimens release a lot of stored energy during tensile failure, the testing system must be
able to withstand the shock that results from the specimen recoil. The grips are impacted the most and must be
robust enough to absorb the energy and still hold the broken specimen halves so they do not eject from the testing
frame. Flying specimen pieces could become a safety hazard to the operator and result in damage to the
equipment. For all of these reasons, hydraulically actuated grips (wedge or side-acting) are recommended.

#18 (57 mm) bar separation (recoil) after failure


Testing Speeds and Control

One of the more challenging aspects of complying with test standards is determining how to properly and
efficiently execute the tensile test. Despite standards providing specific details for allowable test speeds and
control modes for the different stages of the test, it can still be difficult to perform the test properly. This may
relate to both standard interpretation challenges and the limitations of the test equipment.

For rebar tensile testing, it is helpful to break down the tensile test into the separate stages of the test.
This applies regardless of which test standard is being followed.
▪ The 5 basic regions are:
• Pretest

Page 136 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

• Preload
• Elastic Region
• Yielding
• Plastic Region

❖ Pretest
During the pretest stage, the machine is made ready for testing. The proper grips are installed and test
opening adjustments are made. Prior to installing the specimen, the force (load) measurement should be set to
zero.

Once the specimen is loaded into the system, the force should NOT undergo any further “zeroing” as this
will affect the test results. If using a manual extensometer for measuring strain, it should be attached to the
specimen making sure to properly set the knife edges at the instrument’s gauge length. The strain measurement
should then be set to zero prior to loading the specimen.

❖ Preload
The preloading stage is used to apply a minimal preload (<5% of expected yield strength) to the specimen
in order to properly seat it in the grips and to also aid in pulling the specimen straight prior to testing. A plot of
stress or force versus crosshead or actuator displacement will typically show significant displacement for a
minimal increase in load due to the grips and load string pulling tight (taking up system compliance). If a preload
is not applied and an extensometer is being used, many rebar specimens will show negative strain at the
beginning of the test as the specimen straightens. Because of this and/or system compliance, the data during the
preloading portion of the test is often ignored or not recorded on the Stress-Strain graph.
Depending on the amount of system compliance or slack that was taken up (reduced) during the preload,
it may be necessary or desirable to zero the strain measurement at the end of preloading. However, caution must
be taken so as to not adversely affect the overall strain measurement. In either case, test results that rely on strain
from the extensometer should be adjusted so any non-linear behaviour at the very beginning of the test curve
does not adversely affect any test results. This is addressed under the Linear Slope section of results.
❖ Elastic Region (before Yielding)
The elastic region or straight line portion of the test as seen on the Stress-Strain plot can often exhibit
some non-linear behavior initially due to further straightening of the rebar specimen. If using an extensometer,
this may show up as slightly negative strain at the beginning of the test and is generally considered normal for
rebar. Depending on the standard being followed, a variety of test control and target speeds are allowed during
the elastic region and until the onset of yielding. The control and associated rate used may depend on the
equipment limitations or specific product being tested.
❖ Yielding

Once yielding begins, many rebar grades exhibit a defined yield point that is seen as an abrupt bend in
the Stress-Strain test curve. It is then followed by a period of specimen elongation with little to no increase in
force. Because of this, servo-controlled systems must be controlled using crosshead or actuator displacement
feedback in order to maintain a constant rate of travel throughout yielding.

It is very important to note that using stress control during yielding will cause the test to accelerate
excessively, which is in direct violation of the standards. This can also cause the yield point (upper yield) to be
masked or smoothed and cause yield strength results to be higher than expected. Likewise, strain control from
an extensometer can also become erratic during yielding and, is therefore, not recommended when testing rebar.

Page 137 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Elastic and Yielding regions of a rebar Stress-Strain curve

❖ Plastic Region (after Yielding)

As the standards clearly define, it is acceptable for the test speed to be increased after yielding has
completed. For servo-controlled machines, the best way to control the test during this final region is from
crosshead or actuator displacement feedback (same as yielding). However, the speed used can be increased
according to the standard being followed. This allows for the test to complete in a shorter period of time while
still producing acceptable and repeatable results.

Target test rates for rebar test regions

Page 138 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

•Results Nomenclature
Test standards incorporate terms, result names, and symbols to properly identify critical information
sought during testing.
It is very important to fully understand this information in order to ensure standards compliance and
proper results reporting. If testing to multiple standards, it is also necessary to understand the similarities and
differences between these items. In some cases, standards organizations can use different terms or result names
to refer to the same property. The following table shows a few common examples of results that are found in ISO
and ASTM standards. You can see from the table where there are similarities and also differences.

Common rebar tensile results for ISO and ASTM


•Results – No Extensometer
For lower grade bars that exhibit a distinct yield point, it is possible to perform the entire test without
the use of an extensometer. The yield point can be determined from the stress-extension test curve by locating
the first point at which stress drops while extension continues to increase.
On older testing systems, the yield point can be determined manually from witnessing the momentary drop of
the load pointer and calculating the stress from this load value and the nominal cross- sectional area of the bar.
•Results – With Extensometer
Many higher grades of rebar do not exhibit a distinct yield point. In this case it is usually necessary to
determine the yield strength from the offset method. This requires measuring strain with an extensometer and
plotting a Stress-Strain curve from which a 0.2% offset yield strength (Rp 0.2) can be determined. Most modern
testing systems are capable of automatically generating the yield strength. However, it is important to verify and
validate the test method setup to make sure it is delivering consistent and accurate yield strength results. The
following areas should be of particular focus.
•Linear Slope
The test standards describe various approaches for fitting a line to the linear portion of the test curve.
This line is meant to represent the slope of the elastic region of the curve and can intersect the strain axis

Page 139 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

somewhere other than the origin due to grips seating and the load string pulling tight as described previously in
the Preload section. Since the yield strength is dependent on both the slope of this line and its x-intercept, it is
critical that the setup is done properly. The following graph (fig. 10) shows a properly defined linear slope and
the corresponding offset yield strength (Rp0.2).

Improper setup of this slope line could lead to incorrectly failing or passing material due to
inaccurate yield strength results! The graph in fig. 11 includes the same test plot as that in fig. 10. However,
the line defining the linear slope is not fit properly to the test curve and the corresponding offset yield strength
(Rp0.2) is reported higher than it should be.

Page 140 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

•Yield Strength – Offset Method (Rp0.2)


The most common offset used for determining the yield strength of rebar is 0.2%. As the standards
clearly describe, the offset line is drawn parallel to the line representing the linear or elastic region of the graph
and is offset from the x intercept of this line. In order to ensure a proper offset, it is necessary to measure strain
accurately all the way through yield. Anything that adversely affects the strain reading - such as improper
instrument setup or slippage during the test - could directly affect the yield strength result. Improper test control
during yielding can result in yield strengths that are too high. As described previously, acceleration during
yielding violates the test standards. More importantly, acceleration or test speeds in excess of those allowed by
the standards can lead to elevated yield strength values. This is less obvious on rebar grades that do not normally
produce a distinct yield point and can make it easy to incorrectly pass otherwise failing material. Avoid this type
of risk by confirming proper test control is established.
•Elongation
When using an extensometer, it may be possible to record elongation results, such as Agt or % Elongation
after fracture (A5), directly from the strain measurement. This can help automate the recording of elongation
results and eliminate the need for marking the specimen and taking manual measurements after the test.
When determining Agt automatically, the extensometer must remain attached through maximum force.
The total strain at the maximum stress point can then be reported automatically by the system testing software.
It can also be automatically adjusted to the x-intercept of the linear slope line. However, if the extensometer is a
manual type device that needs to be removed before failure, it can be quite dangerous to require the operator to
remove it after maximum force occurs. Many grades of rebar will exhibit violent failure shortly after maximum
force is achieved. Automatic extensometers provide the added benefit of automatic removal at any point during
the test. This protects the operator and possibly the instrument while still allowing for automatic capture of Agt.

Page 141 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

When automatically determining % Elongation after fracture, typically the extensometer must be left on
through fracture. Strain is then recorded at the break point determined at the end of the test. The test software
must also be able to subtract off the elastic portion of strain to make the result more comparable to the manual
method. This is dependent on the standard being followed. If the fracture occurs too close to the knife edge, the
elongation results will be lower than expected and may not pass.
TENSION TEST OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM E8

Objectives:
•To determine the tensile strength of a steel sample
•To examine/evaluate the elastic and inelastic behavior of the tested steel under given load conditions.
•To describe the pattern of failure of the tested steel.
•To plot the stress-strain diagram for the tested specimen.
Apparatus/Materials:
•Universal Testing Machine
•Mechanical and Electronic Extensometer
•Micrometer
Procedure:
1.) Measure the dimensions of the specimen. Mark each quarter point along the length of the steel bar.
2.) Determine and record the average cross-sectional dimensions of the specimen with a micrometer.
3.) Secure the ends of the specimen in the UTM.
4.) Switch on the UTM. Set gage dials to zero. Apply increments of the load slowly until the specimen fails. Record
the applied load and corresponding elongation for each increment load.
5.) Remove the failed section. Measure. Observe the fracture pattern. Put the broken parts together and measure
the dimensions of tested specimen.

CHARACTERISTICS AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF WOOD


❖ Hardness - is the quality or state of being hard.
The hardness of a wood is rated on an industry wide standard known as the Janka test. The Janka test
measures the force required to embed a .444 inch steel ball into the wood by half its diameter.
❖ Conductivity - is the measure of the ease at which an electric charge or heat can pass through a material.
In the direction of the grain, the thermal conductivity of wood is about twice what it is perpendicular to
the grain. For example, the thermal conductivity of pine in the direction of the grain is 0.22 W/moC, and
perpendicular to the grain 0.14 W/moC.
❖ Density - is a measure of mass per volume.

Page 142 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

The density of wood differs from type to type depending on the tree growth environment, tree species,
and the tree area measured for density calculation. Fast growing trees have a low density. Older and slowly
growing trees have a higher wood density.
❖ Warping - is to bend or twist out of shape, especially from a straight or flat form, as timbers or flooring.
▪ Types of Warping

• Bow – Wood warps along the length of the lumber bending the thinnest face in a curve.
• Crook- Wood warps along the length of the lumber bending the thicker face in a curve.
• Kink – Wood warps along the width of the lumber producing a pronounced kink in the straight face.
• Cup – Wood warps along the length of the lumber with the two long edges cupping towards each
other.
• Twist/wind – Wood warps along the length of the lumber with either end twisting in opposing
directions.

❖ Cracking - the process of breaking into smaller units, especially the process of splitting a large heavy
hydrocarbon molecule into smaller, lighter components. Splits and cracks (known as ‘checks’ in the industry)
occur when wood shrinks as it dries.

❖ Swelling - is an increase of the dimensions of wood due to changes of its moisture content.

Page 143 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Swelling occurs as the wood changes moisture content in response to daily as well as seasonal changes
in the relative humidity of the atmosphere. When the air is humid, wood adsorbs moisture and swells; when
the air is dry, wood loses moisture and shrinks.
❖ Internal stress - is a stress existing within the material as a result of thermal changes, having been worked,
or irregularity of molecular structure.
❖ Color - the aspect of any object that may be described in terms of hue, lightness, and saturation.
❖ Luster - refers to how light is reflected from the surface of a mineral.
❖ Texture - is the quality of something that can be known by touch, or the degree to which something is rough
or smooth or soft or hard.
Textures might be divided into two categories, namely, tactile and visual textures.
▪ Tactile textures - refer to the immediate tangible feel of a surface.
▪ Visual textures - refer to the visual impression that textures produce to human observer.
❖ Odor - is anything you can smell like a scent or an aroma.
Example of Odorous Woods:
▪ Cocobolo: Technically a true member of the rosewood genus (Dalergia), Cocobolo also has a pleasing
spicy scent that has been used in perfume.
▪ Lignum Vitae: This tree, along with its Argentinian variant, is harvested in the production of oil of
guaiac, an ingredient in perfumes.
▪ Sandalwood: Reported to retain its scent for decades, essential oils from the wood are also extracted
and used in perfumes.
❖ Moisture - refers to the presence of a liquid, especially water.
The equilibrium moisture content of wood is a state corresponding to the air temperature and relative
moisture, in which the moisture content of the wood remains steady.

TESTING REQUIREMENTS

“Standard Test Methods for Small Clear Specimens of Timber”

REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM D 143-94 (REAPPROVED 2000)Є1

1) SCOPE
a) These methods cover the determination of various strength and related properties of wood by testing
small clear specimens.
b) These methods represent procedures for evaluating the different mechanical and physical properties,
controlling factors such as specimen size, moisture content, temperature, and rate of loading.
c) The procedures for the various tests are the following:
• Photographs of Specimens
• Control of Moisture Content and Temperature
• Record of Heartwood and Sapwood
• Static Bending
• Compression Parallel to Grain

Page 144 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

• Impact Bending
• Toughness
• Compression Perpendicular to Grain
• Hardness
• Shear Parallel to Grain
• Cleavage
• Tension Parallel to Grain
• Tension Perpendicular to Grain
• Nail Withdrawal
• Specific Gravity and Shrinkage in Volume
• Radial and Tangential Shrinkage
• Moisture Determination
• Permissible Variations
• Calibration
2) Summary of Methods
a) The mechanical tests are static bending, compression parallel to grain, impact bending toughness,
compression perpendicular to grain, hardness, shear parallel to grain, cleavage, tension parallel to grain,
tension-perpendicular to-grain, and nail-withdrawal tests.
b) In addition, methods for evaluating such physical properties as specific gravity, shrinkage in volume,
radial shrinkage, and tangential shrinkage are presented.
3) Photographs of Specimens
a) Four of the static bending specimens from each species shall be selected for photographing, as follows:
two average growth, one fast growth, and one slow growth. These specimens shall be photographed in
cross section and on the radial and tangential surfaces. Fig. 1 is a typical photograph of a cross section of
2 by 2-in. (50 by 50-mm) test specimens, and Fig. 2 is the tangential surface of such specimens.

FIG. 1 Cross Sections of Bending Specimens Showing Different Rates of Growth of Longleaf Pine (2 by 2-in.
(50 by 50-mm) Specimens)

Page 145 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

FIG. 2 Tangential Surfaces of Bending Specimens of Different Rates of Growth of Jeffrey Pine (2 by 2-in. (50 by 50
by 760-mm) Specimens)
4) Control of Moisture Content and Temperature

a) In recognition of the significant influence of temperature and moisture content on the strength of wood,
it is highly desirable that these factors be controlled to ensure comparable test results.
b) Control of Moisture Content
i) Specimens for the test in the air-dry condition shall be dried to approximately constant weight before
test.
ii) Should any changes in moisture content occur during final preparation of specimens, the specimens
shall be reconditioned to constant weight before test
iii) it is desirable that the testing room and rooms for preparation of test specimens have some means of
humidity control.
5) Record of Heartwood and Sapwood
a) Proportion of Sapwood
i) The estimated proportion of sapwood present should be recorded for each test specimen.
6) Static Bending
a) Size of Specimens
i) The static bending tests shall be made on 2 by 2 by 30 in. (50 by 50 by 760 mm) primary method
specimens or 1 by 1 by 16 in. (25 by 25 by 410 mm) secondary method specimens. The actual height
and width at the center and the length shall be measured.
b) Loading Span and Supports
i) Use center loading and a span length of 28 in. (710 mm) for the primary method and 14 in. (360 mm)
for the secondary method. These spans were established in order to maintain a minimum span-to-
depth ratio of 14.
ii) Both supporting knife edges shall be provided with bearing plates and rollers of such thickness that
the distance from the point of support to the central plane is not greater than the depth of the
specimen.

Page 146 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

FIG. 3 Static Bending Test Assembly Showing Method of Load Application, Specimen Supported on Rollers and
Laterally Adjustable Knife Edges, and Method of Measuring Deflection at Neutral Axis by Means of Yoke and Dial
Attachment (Adjustable scale mounted on loading head is used to measure increments of deformation beyond
the dial capacity.)
c) Bearing Block
i) A bearing block of the form and size of that shown in Fig. 4 shall be used for applying the load for
primary method specimens. A block having a radius of 11⁄2 in. (38 mm) for a chord length of not less
than 2 in. (50 mm) shall be used for secondary method specimens.

FIG. 4 Details of Bearing Block for Static Bending Tests

d) Placement of Growth Rings


i) The specimen shall be placed so that the load will be applied through the bearing block to the
tangential surface nearest the pith.
e) Speed of Testing

Page 147 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

i) The load shall be applied continuously throughout the test at a rate of motion of the movable
crosshead of 0.10 in. (2.5 mm)/min, for primary method specimens, and at a rate of 0.05 in. (1.3
mm)/min for secondary method specimens.
f) Load-Deflection Curves
i) Load-deflection curves shall be recorded to or beyond the maximum load for all static bending tests.
g) Description of Static Bending Failures
i) Static bending (flexural) failures shall be classified in accordance with the appearance of the fractured
surface and the manner in which the failure develops (Fig. 6). The fractured surfaces may be roughly
divided into “brash” and “fibrous”, the term “brash” indicating abrupt failure and“ fibrous” indicating
a fracture showing splinters.

FIG. 6 Types of Failures in Static Bending

7) Compression Parallel to Grain

a) Size of Specimens
i) The compression-parallel-to-grain tests shall be made on 2 by 2 by 8 in. (50 by 50 by 200 mm)
primary method specimens, or 1 by 1 by 4 in. (25 by 25 by 100 mm) secondary method specimens.
The actual cross-sectional dimensions and the length shall be measured
b) End Surfaces Parallel
i) ensure that the end grain surfaces will be parallel to each other and at right angles to the longitudinal
axis.
ii) At least one platen of the testing machine shall be equipped with a spherical bearing to obtain uniform
distribution of load over the ends of the specimen.
c) Speed of Testing
i) The load shall be applied continuously throughout the test at a rate of motion of the movable
crosshead of 0.003 in./in. (mm/mm) of nominal specimen length/min
Page 148 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

d) Load-Compression Curves
i) Load-compression curves shall be taken over a central gage length not exceeding 6 in. (150 mm) for
primary method specimens, and 2 in. (50 mm) for secondary method specimens.
e) Position of Test Failures
i) In order to obtain satisfactory and uniform results, it is necessary that the failures be made to develop
in the body of the specimen. With specimens of uniform cross section, this result can best be obtained
when the ends are at a very slightly lower moisture content than the body.
f) Descriptions of Compression Failures
i) Compression failures shall be classified in accordance with the appearance of the fractured surface.
In case two or more kinds of failures develop, all shall be described in the order of their occurrence;
for example, shearing followed by brooming. The failure shall also be sketched in its proper position
on the data sheet (see fig. 10) .
g) Weight and Moisture Content
i) The specimen shall be weighed immediately before test, and after the test a moisture section
approximately 1 in. (25 mm) in length shall be cut from the specimen near the point of failure.
h) Ring and Latewood Measurement
i) When practicable, the number of rings per inch (average ring width in millimetres) and the
proportion of summerwood shall be measured over a representative inch (centimetre) of cross
section of the test specimen.

Page 149 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

8) Impact Bending
a) Size of Specimens
i) The impact bending tests shall be made on 2 by 2 by 30 in. (50 by 50 by 760 mm) specimens. The
actual height and width at the center and the length shall be measured
b) Loading and Span
i) Use center loading and a span length of 28 in. (710 mm).
c) Bearing Block
i) A metal tup of curvature corresponding to the bearing block shown in Fig. 4 shall be used in applying
the load.
d) Placement of Growth Rings
Page 150 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

i) The specimen shall be placed so that the load will be applied through the bearing block to the
tangential surface nearest the pith.
e) Procedure
i) Make the tests by increment drops in a Hatt-Turner or similar impact machine (see Fig. 11). The first
drop shall be 1 in. (25 mm), after which increase the drops by 1 in. increments until a height of 10 in.
(250 mm) is reached. Then use a 2 in. (50 mm) increment until complete failure occursor a 6 in. (150
mm) deflection is reached.

f) Weight of Hammer
i) A 50 lbf (22.5 kg) hammer shall be used when, with drops up to the capacity of the machine (about
68 in. (1.7 m) for the small Hatt-Turner impact machine), it is practically certain that complete failure
or a 6 in. (150 mm) deflection will result for all specimens of a species. For all other cases, a 100 lbf
(45 kg) hammer shall be used.
g) Deflection Records
i) When desired, graphical drum records giving the deflection for each drop and the set, if any, shall be
made until the first failure occurs. This record will also afford data from which the exact height of
drop can be scaled for at least the first four falls.
h) Drop Causing Failure
i) The height of drop causing either complete failure or a 6 in. (150 mm) deflection shall be observed
for each specimen.
i) Description of Failure
i) The failure shall be sketched on the data sheet and described in accordance with the directions for
static bending in 8.7.
j) Weight and Moisture Content
i) The specimen shall be

Page 151 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

ii) weighed immediately before test, and after the test a moisture section approximately 1 in. (25 mm)
in length shall be cut from the specimen near the point of failure
9) Toughness
a) Size of Specimen
i) The toughness tests shall be made on 0.79 by 0.79 by 11 in. (20 by 20 by 280 mm) specimens. The
actual height and width at the center and the length shall be measured
b) Loading and Span
i) Center loading and a span length of 9.47 in. (240 mm) shall be used. The load shall be applied to a
radial or tangential surface on alternate specimens.
c) Bearing Block
i) An aluminum tup (Fig. 15) having a radius of 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) shall be used in applying the load.

d) Apparatus and Procedure


i) Make the tests in a pendulum type toughness machine (Note 7) (See Fig. 15). Adjust the machine
before test so that the pendulum hangs vertically, and adjust it to compensate for friction. Adjust the
cable so that the load is applied to the specimen when the pendulum swings to 15° from the vertical,
so as to produce complete failure by the time the downward swing is completed. Choose the weight
position and initial angle (30, 45, or 60°) of the pendulum, so that complete failure of the specimen is
obtained on one drop. Most satisfactory results are obtained when the difference between the initial
and final angle is at least 10°.
e) Calculation
Page 152 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

i) The initial and final angle shall be read to the nearest 0.1° by means of the vernier (Fig. 15) attached
to the machine
ii) The toughness shall then be calculated as follows:

f) Weight and Moisture Content


i) The specimen shall be weighed immediately before test, and after test a moisture section
approximately 2 in. (50 mm) in length shall be cut from the specimen near the failure
10) Compression Perpendicular to Grain
a) Size of Specimens
i) The compression-perpendicular to-grain tests shall be made on 2 by 2 by 6 in. (50 by 50 by 150 mm)
specimens. The actual height, width, and length shall be measure
b) Loading
i) The load shall be applied through a metal bearing plate 2 in. (50 mm) in width, placed across the
upper surface of the specimen at equal distances from the ends and at right angles to the length (Fig.
17). The actual width of the bearing plate shall be measured.

Page 153 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

c) Placement of Growth Rings


i) The specimens shall be placed so that the load will be applied through the bearing plate to a radial
surface.
d) Speed of Testing
i) The load shall be applied continuously throughout the test at a rate of motion of the movable
crosshead of 0.012 in. (0.305 mm)/mi
e) Load-Compression Curves
i) Load-compression curves shall be taken for all specimens up to 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) compression, after
which the test shall be discontinued. Compression shall be measured between the loading surfaces.
ii) Deflection readings shall be taken to 0.0001 in. (0.002 mm).
f) Weight and Moisture Content
i) The specimen shall be weighed immediately before test, and after test a moisture section
approximately 1 in. (25 mm) in length shall be cut adjacent to the part under load
11) Hardness
a) Size of Specimens
i) The hardness tests shall be made on 2 by 2 by 6 in. (50 by 50 by 150 mm) specimens. The actual cross-
sectional dimensions and length shall be measured
b) Procedure
i) Use the modified ball test with a “ball” 0.444 in. (11.3 mm) in diameter for determining hardness (Fig.
19). The projected area of the ball on the test specimen is 1 cm2. Record the load at which the ball has
penetrated to one half its diameter, as determined by an electric circuit indicator or by the tightening
of the collar against the specimen.

Page 154 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

c) Number of Penetration
i) Two penetrations shall be made on a tangential surface, two on a radial surface, and one on each end.
The choice between the two radial and between the two tangential surfaces shall be such as to give a
fair average of the piece. The penetrations shall be far enough from the edge to prevent splitting or
chippin
d) Speed of Testing
i) The load shall be applied continuously throughout the test at a rate of motion of the movable
crosshead of 0.25 in. (6 mm/min)
e) Weight and Moisture Content
i) The specimen shall be weighed immediately before the test, and after the test a moisture section
approximately 1 in. (25 mm) in length shall be cut.

12) Shear Parallel to Grain


a) This section describes one method of making the shear-parallel-to-grain test that has been extensively
used and found satisfactory.
b) Size of Specimens

Page 155 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

i) The shear-parallel-to-grain tests shall be made on a 2 by 2 by 21⁄2in. (50 by 50 by 63 mm) specimens


notched in accordance with Fig. 21 to produce failure on a 2 by 2 in. (50 by 50 mm)surface. The actual
dimensions of the shearing surface shall be measured

c) Procedure
i) Use a shear tool similar to that illustrated in Fig. 22, providing a 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) offset between the
inner edge of the supporting surface and the plane of the adjacent edge of the loading surface. Apply
the load to and support the specimen on end-grain surfaces. Take care in placing the specimen in the
shear tool to see that the crossbar is adjusted, so that the edges of the specimen are vertical and the
end rests evenly on the support over the contact area. Observe the maximum load only.
d) Speed of Testing
i) The load shall be applied continuously throughout the test at a rate of motion of the movable
crosshead of 0.024 in. (0.6 mm)/min
e) Test Failures
i) The failure shall be sketched on the data sheet In all cases where the failure at the base of the
specimen extends back onto the supporting surface, the test shall be culled.
f) Moisture Content
i) Moisture Content—The portion of the test piece that is sheared off shall be used as a moisture
specimen
13) Cleavage
a) Size of Specimens
i) The cleavage tests shall be made on specimens of the form and size in accordance with Fig. 24. The
actual width and length at minimum section shall be measured

Page 156 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

b) Procedure
i) The specimens shall be held during test in grips as shown in Figs. 25 and 26. Observe the maximum
load only.
c) Speed of Testing
i) The load shall be applied continuously throughout the test at a rate of motion of the movable
crosshead of 0.10 in. (2.5 mm)/min
d) Sketch of Failure
i) The failure shall be sketched on the data sheet
e) Moisture Content
i) One of the pieces remaining after failure, or a section split along the surface of failure, shall be used
as a moisture specimen
14) Tension Parallel to Grain
a) Size of Specimens
i) The tension-parallel-to-grain tests shall be made on specimens of the size and shape in accordance
with Fig. 28. The specimen shall be so oriented that the direction of the annual rings at the critical
section on the ends of the specimens, shall be perpendicular to the greater cross-sectional dimension.
The actual cross-sectional dimensions at minimum section shall be measured.

Page 157 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

b) Procedure
i) Fasten the specimen in special grips (Fig. 29). Deformation shall be measured over a 2 in. (50 mm)
central gage length on all specimens. Take load-extension readings until the proportional limit is
passed.

Page 158 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

ii) Read deformations to 0.0001 in. (0.002 mm).


c) Speed of Testing
i) The load shall be applied continuously throughout the test at a rate of motion of the movable
crosshead of 0.05 in (1mm)/min
d) Sketch of Failure
i) The failure shall be sketched on the data sheet
e) Moisture Content
i) A moisture section about 3 in. (76 mm) in length shall be cut from the reduced section near the failure
15) Tension Perpendicular to Grain

a) Size of Specimens

Page 159 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

i) The tension-perpendicular-to grain tests shall be made on specimens of the size and shape in
accordance with Fig. 31. The actual width and length at minimum sections shall be measured

FIG. 31 Tension-Perpendicular-to-Grain Test Specimen

b) Procedure
i) Fasten the specimens during test in grips as shown in Figs. 32 and 33. Observe the maximum load
only.

Page 160 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

c) Speed of Testing
i) The load shall be applied continuously throughout the test at a rate of motion of the movable
crosshead of 0.10 in. (2.5 mm)/min
d) Sketch of Failure
i) The failure shall be sketched on the data sheet
e) Moisture Content
i) One of the pieces remaining after failure or a section split along the surface of failure, shall be used as
a moisture specimen.
16) Nail Withdrawal
a) Nails

Page 161 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

i) Nails used for withdrawal tests shall be 0.0985 in. (2.5 mm) in diameter (Note 16). Bright diamond-
point nails shall be used. All nails shall be cleaned before use to remove any coating or surface film
that may be present as a result of manufacturing operations. Each nail shall be used once.
Note 16: A five penny common nail meets this requirement. If difficulty is experienced with high-density
woods in pulling the nails without breaking the heads, a seven penny cement-coated sinker nail with coating
removed by use of a suitable solvent, may be used.
b) Preparation of Specimens
i) Nails shall be driven at right angles to the face of the specimen to a total penetration of 11⁄4 in. (32
mm). Two nails shall be driven on a tangential surface, two on a radial surface, and one on each end.
The choice between the two radial and two tangential surfaces shall be such as to give a fair average
of the piece. On radial and tangential faces, the nails shall be driven a sufficient distance from the
edges and ends of the specimen to avoid splitting. In general, nails should not be driven closer than
3⁄4 in. (19 mm) from the edge or 11⁄2 in. (38 mm) from the end of a piece. The two nails on a radial
or tangential face should not be driven in line with each other or less than 2 in. (50 mm) apart.

c) Procedure
i) Withdraw all six nails in a single specimen immediately after driving. Fasten the specimens during
the test in grips as shown in Figs. 35 and 36. Observe the maximum load only

Page 162 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

d) Speed of Testing
i) The load shall be applied continuously throughout the test at a rate of motion of the movable
crosshead of 0.075 in. (2 mm)/min

Page 163 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

e) Weight and Moisture Content


i) The specimen shall be weighed immediately before driving the nails. After the test, a moisture section
approximately 1 in. (25 mm) in length shall be cut from specimen.
17) Specific Gravity and Shrinkage in Volume
a) Size of Specimens
i) The specific gravity and shrinkage in volume tests shall be made on green 2 by 2 by 6 in. (50 by 50 by
150 mm) specimens. The actual cross-sectional dimensions and length shall be measured
b) Procedure:
i) Obtain both specific gravity and shrinkage-involume determinations on the same specimen. Make
these determinations at approximately 12 % moisture content and at the oven-dry condition
ii) A carbon impression of the end of the green specimen may be made on the back of the data sheet In
like manner, a carbon impression of the same end may be made after the specimen has been
conditioned.
iii) Weigh the specimen when green and determine the volume by the immersion method in accordance
with the procedures of Test Methods D 2395.
iv) Open-pile the green specimens after immersion and allow them to air-season under room conditions
to a uniform moisture content of approximately 12 %. The specimens should then be weighed and
the volume determined by the immersion method.
v) Then, open-pile the specimens used for specific gravity and shrinkage determinations at 12 %
moisture content, or duplicate specimens on which green weight and volume measurements have
been made prior to conditioning to approximately 12 % moisture content in an oven. Dry at 103 6
2°C until approximately constant mass is reached (Test Methods D 4442).
vi) After oven-drying, weigh the specimens and while still warm, immerse them in a hot paraffin bath,
taking care to remove them quickly to ensure a thin coating.
vii) Determine the volume of the paraffin-coated specimen by immersion as before.
viii) Fig. 39 illustrates the apparatus used in determining the specific gravity and shrinkage in volume.
The use of an automatic balance will facilitate increased rapidity and accuracy of measurements.

Page 164 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

FIG. 39 Specific Gravity and Shrinkage-in-Volume Test Set-Up


ix) The green specimens shall be open-piled and allowed to air-season under room conditions to a
uniform moisture content of approximately 12 %.
x) After weighing and measuring, the specimens shall then be open-piled in an oven and dried at 103 6
2°C until approximately constant mass is attained (Test Methods D 4442).
c) Final Measurement
i) Measurements of mass and length shall be made on the oven-dry specimens
d) Method of Measurement
i) Fig. 41 illustrates the method of making the radial and tangential shrinkage measurements. An
ordinary micrometer of required accuracy is suitable for this work

Page 165 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

FIG. 41 Radial- and Tangential-Shrinkage Test Assembly

18) Radial and Tangential Shrinkage


a) Size of Specimens
i) The radial and tangential shrinkage determinations shall be made on green 1 by 4 by 1 in. (25 by 100
by 25 mm) specimens cut from 1 by 4-in. (25 by 100-mm) boards, edge grain and flat grain,
respectively.
b) Initial Measurement
i) The length of all specimens shall be measured.
c) Weight
i) The specimen shall be weighed when green and after subsequent oven-drying
d) Drying
i) The green specimens shall be open-piled and allowed to air-season under room conditions to a
uniform moisture content of approximately 12 %.
ii) After weighing and measuring, the specimens shall then be open-piled in an oven and dried at 103 6
2°C until approximately constant mass is attained (Test Methods D 4442).
e) Final Measurement
i) Measurements of mass and length shall be made on the oven-dry specimens
f) Method of Measurement
i) Fig. 41 illustrates the method of making the radial and tangential shrinkage measurements. An
ordinary micrometer of required accuracy is suitable for this work
19) Moisture Determination
a) Selection
i) The sample for moisture determinations of each test specimen shall be selected as described for each
test.
b) Weighing
i) Immediately after obtaining the moisture sample, all loose splinters shall be removed and the sample
shall be weighed
c) Drying
i) The moisture samples shall be open-piled in an oven and dried at a temperature of 103 6 2°C until
approximately constant mass is attained, after which the oven-dry mass shall be determined
d) Moisture Content
i) The loss in mass, expressed in percent of the oven-dry mass as determined, shall be considered the
moisture content of the specimen.

Page 166 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

20) Mass and Permissible Variations


a) Mass
i) The mass of test specimens and of moisture samples shall be determined to an accuracy of not less
than 0.2 %.
b) Measurements
i) Measurements of test specimens shall be made to an accuracy of not less than 0.3 %, except that in
no case shall the measurements be made to less than 0.01 in. (0.25 mm). However, measurements of
radial and tangential shrinkage specimens shall be made to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.02 mm).
c) Testing Machine Speeds
i) The testing machine speed used should not vary by more than 25 % from that specified for a given
test. If the specified speed cannot be obtained, the speed used shall be recorded on the data sheet.
The crosshead speed shall mean the free-running or no-load speed of crosshead for testing machines
of the mechanical drive type and the loaded crosshead speed for testing machines of the hydraulic
loading type.
21) Calibration
a) All apparatus used in obtaining data shall be calibrated at sufficiently frequent intervals to ensure
accuracy
22) Precision and Bias
a) Statements of precision and bias for the tests have not yet been developed.

Determination of the Moisture Content of Wood

REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM D 144-83

Introduction

Moisture content of wood affects its strength. Prior to its use in construction, wood must be free from
objectionable defects and free from moisture that will cause it to shrink further develop cracks. Determination
of moisture content in wood helps in quantifying the amount of water in it and help determines to what degree
of seasoning is required to render it suitable for building construction. This test uses drying as a means to
determine the amount of moisture present in a wood sample.

Objectives:
1. To determine the moisture content of a wood sample.

2. To understand the influence of moisture content to wood strength


Apparatus/Materials:

⚫ Oven
⚫ Wood sample
⚫ Weighing Balance
⚫ Ruler
Procedures:

Page 167 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

1. Prepare a sample for moisture content determination.


2. Weigh the sample including its loose splinters.
3. Dry the sample in an oven at a temperature 103+2°C until it reaches a constant weight.
4. Weigh the oven-dried sample.
Data Analysis:

w = (Mw-Md)/Md x 100%

Where:
w = moisture content

Mw = mass of the wood before drying (grams)


Md = mass of the wood after drying (grams)

Percent Reduction in Volume = (V1 - V2)/V2 x 100%

Where:
V1 = original volume (cm³)

V2 = final volume (cm³)


Results:

Moisture content _______________________________________________________


Percent Reduction in Volume ___________________________________________

Discription of apperance after drying ____________________________________

LABORATORY NUMBER 15
TEST FOR COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF WOOD PARALLEL TO THE GRAIN
REFERENCED STANDARD : ASTM D 143- 83/ASTM D 198
INTRODUCTION
Wood has been used in building in a construction for a variety of purposes due to its lightness, durability
and strength. The strength of the wood has influenced by the structure of its grain. Tensile resistance along the
grain is much greater than the resistance between fibers. When subjected to bending, a piece of wood having
grains that run longitudinally has strong tensile and compressive strength compared to cross-grain wood.
OBJECTIVES
1. To determine the strength of wood under compressive loading.
2. To evaluate the strength of the tested sample against the allowable strength of its kind.
APPARATUS
⚫ Testing machine
⚫ Load indicator

Page 168 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

⚫ Bearing blocks
⚫ Ruler
⚫ Caliper
⚫ Wood samples
PROCEDURES
1. Prepare a wood block according to the specifications of the laboratory instructor. measure then record the
dimensions of the specimen to the nearest 0.01 inch.
2. Place the specimen in the testing machine.
3. Apply the load continuously until the specimen fails. Record the deformation for each increment of 2000 lb
load. Take simultaneous and deformation readings until the maximum load has been reached.
4. At the first sign of cracking, remove the strain device and continue loading until the maximum load is recahed.
Sketch the sample, indicating the grain wood and manner of failure.
DATA ANALYSIS
Compressive strength
Sc = P / A
Where:
Sc - compressive strength
P - total load in kg
A - bearing area (m^2 or mm^2) surface area perpendicular to load application.

TEST FOR STATIC BENDING OF WOOD


REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM D 143-83

INTRODUCTION
Lumber for construction use is classified according to appearance and strength. Most wooden structural
members are subjected to flexural and compressive forces, thus, must be tested for working stresses.
Design codes require that structural wooden members be evaluated against allowable working stresses.
These allowable values take care of the unknown qualities that lumber may possess which may affect its strength
against tensile and compressive strength.
This test determines the physical properties of wood subjected to bending.
Objectives
1. To determine the maximum bending stress and the elasticity of a wood specimen
2. To evaluate the results of the tested specimen against the given properties of the same type of wood
3. To examine and identify the type of failure of the tested specimen.

Page 169 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

MATERIALS
• Universal Testing Machine
• Load Bearing Block
• Wood Specimen 0.75m Long
• Supporting Apparatus
• Deflection Apparatus
PROCEDURE
1. Mark the center and end points of the specimen for a 0.75 m span.
2. Place the beam in the machine with the ends place on the supports and place the loading block at the
center of the beam (midpoint loading). The whole assembly shall be properly centered such that the
loading block is at the center of the machine’s loading head.
3. Lower the loading head until a small compressive load is apllied to the beam. Place the deflection gage at
the midspan in such a way that it can measure the midspan deflection of the beam. Set the gage of the
deflection and the testing machine to zero.
4. Apply the load continuously at the rate of 1.000 lb per min. Take simultaneous load and deflection
readings for increment of every 200 lbs until the maximum load has been reached. Remove the dial gage
prior to the failure of the beam.
5. Sketch the type of failure and plot load-deflection curve.
DATA ANALYSIS
1. Maximum Bending Stress
f= 3PmaxL/ 2bh^2
Where:
F = maximum bending stress (MPa)
Pmax = maximum load (MN)
L = length of specimen (m)
B = width of the section (m)
D = depth of the section
2. Modulus of elasticity
E= PL/ A8= PL^3/48bd^3
Where:
P = maximum load (MN)
L = length of specimen (m)
b = width of the section (m)
h = height of the section
8 = deflection (m)

Page 170 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

TEST FOR TENSILE STRENGTH OF WOOD PARALLEL TO THE GRAIN


REFERENCED STANDARD : ASTM D 143-83
Tensile strength is the capability of a material to resist tearing. The resistance of material to a force tending
to tear it apart, measured as the maximum tension the material can endure without tearing. The tensile strength
of wood parallel to the grain depends upon the strength of the fibers and is affected not only by nature and
dimensions of the wood elements but also by their arrangement. The tensile strength of wood is greater along
the grain than across the grain.
Three types of wood:
⚫ Softwoods
⚫ Hardwoods
⚫ Engineered wood
Softwoods
Are the wood and lumber which are milled from conifer trees. Scientifically known as Gymnosperms, Conifer
trees are any trees which have needles and produce cones.
Examples: Pine, Cedar, Fir, Spruce, and Redwood.
Hardwoods
Hardwoods come from any trees which do not produce needles or cones. These trees are most commonly
are known as deciduous trees, more scientifically known as angiosperms. Hardwoods are trees which produces
leaves and seeds.
Examples: Oak, Maple, Cherry, Mahogany, and Walnut.
Engineered Wood: Manufactured Wood Products
Engineered wood does not occur naturally in the environment but instead are manufactured.
These boards are generally made with wood which is manipulated to have certain qualities or features. Also
known as composite wood, these products are often made from the waste wood of sawmills. It is often treated
through chemical or a heat process to produce a wood product which can meet certain sizes that would be
difficult to achieve from nature.
Popular examples of engineered woods include Plywood, Oriented Strand Board, Medium Density Fiber
Board, and Composite Board. Wood veneers can also sometimes be classified as engineered wood, since it often
needs to be manipulated either through specialized cutting techniques or joining pieces together to achieve a
specific size or wood grain patterning.
FAILURES:
⚫ Simple tension
⚫ Cross-grained tension
⚫ Splintering tension
⚫ Brittle tension
⚫ Compression failure
Page 171 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

⚫ Horizontal shear failure


Simple tension
In which there is a direct pulling in two of the wood on the underside
Cross-grained tension
In which the fracture is caused by a tensile force acting oblique to the grain.
Splintering tension
In which the failure consist of a considerable number of slight tension failures.
Brittle tension
In which the beam fails by a clean break extending entirely through it.
Compression failure
Compressive stress parallel to the fibers causes them to buckle or bend as in an ending compressive test.
Horizontal shear failure
In which the upper and lower portions slide along each other for a portion of their length either at one or at
both ends.
OBJECTIVES:
1. To calculate the tensile strength of a wood sample
2. To evaluate the test result against the given allowable tensile stress of the same type of wood sample
3. To examine and describe the type and pattern of failure
APPARATUS/MATERIALS:
⚫ Tension apparatus
⚫ Strain gages
⚫ Grips
⚫ Wood samples

PROCEDURE:
1. Prepare the wood sample. Measure its dimensions.
2. Assemble the tension apparatus the place the wood sample in the grips.
3. Apply increments of load. Read and record the deformation at each increment of load.
4. Right before failure remove the deformation gage then continue loading until the specimen fails. Sketch the
type of failure.
DATA ANALYSIS:
Tensile Strength

Page 172 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

P
St = A

Where: P = maximum load


2
A = load bearing area of wood( mm )

TEST FOR SHEAR STRESS OF WOOD PARALLEL TO GRAIN


REFERENCED STANDARD: ASTM D 143-83

INTRODUCTION
Shearing of wood is common in wood subjected to loads along its grain. This test is used to determine the
shear stress of a wood section subjected to a load applied along the direction of its grain.
Objectives
1. To determine the shear strength of a wood sample.
2. To evaluate the test result of the sample against the given allowable shear stress of the same type of
wood.
3. To examine and describe the type and pattern of failure.

MATERIALS
• Compression Machine
• Shear Apparatus
• Wood Section

PROCEDURE
1. Assemble the shear apparatus and the compression machine.
2. Prepare the wood specimen. Record its dimensions.
3. Place the wood section in the shear apparatus.
4. Apply the load at a continuous rate. Observe the wood section at each increment of load. Sketch the failure
pattern.

DATA ANALYSIS
Shear Stress= P/A
Where:
P= applied maximum load (kg)
A= Area of shear plane (mm)^2

Page 173 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Self-Help: You can also refer to the sources below to help you further understand the lesson:

Kultermann E. and Spence, William. (2017). Construction Materials, Methods, and


Techniques: Building a sustainable future. 4th Edition. Australia: Cencage Learning

Ahmed, A. and Sturges, J. (2015). Materials science in construction: an introduction.


Abingdon, Oxon; New York, NY: Routledge

Allen, E. and Iano, J. (2014). Fundamentals of Building Construction: Materials and Methods. 6th
Edition. Hoboken, New Jersey: Wiley

Let’s Check Activity 1. Now that you know some types and properties of common construction
materials let us try to check how far you had learned. In the space provided, write the term/s
being asked in the following statements.

___________1. It separates the iron from the waste materials and sinters the ore and flue dusts.
___________2. is the medium stage cast iron which properties are in between gray cast iron and white cast
iron.
___________ 3. The world’s foremost construction material that contains between 0.2% and 2% carbon by
weight and sometimes small amounts of other elements, including manganese.
___________ 4. It is ASTM Standard Test Methods for Small Clear Specimens of Timber.

___________ 5. This is a kind of steel bar that is used in the form of strands or tendons.
___________ 6. A type of wood that are most commonly are known as deciduous trees, more scientifically
known as angiosperms.
__________ 7. The machine used for tensile test.
___________ 8. In the stress-strain diagram, it is the point in which the material will no longer go back to its
original shape when the load is removed.
___________ 9. An increase of the dimensions of wood due to changes of its moisture content.
____________ 10. In the stress-strain diagram, it is the point at which the material will have an appreciable
elongation without any increase in load.

Let’s Analyze
Activity 1. Getting acquainted with the types and properties of some common and advanced
construction materials. what also matters is you should also be able to explain some its
properties. Now, choose 5 most important properties of metals which you believe are essential in
determining its suitability for intended used in construction. Why?
Activity 2. Why is it important to determine the moisture content of wood?

In a Nutshell

Activity 1. The study of types and properties of construction materials such as steel and woods, is
indeed pre-requisite to becoming an engineer.

Page 174 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Based on the topics presented and learning exercises that you have done, why would you choose
structural steel as construction material. Please feel free to write your answer below. I have indicated
mine.

1. It speeds up construction productivity.


2. Compared to other construction materials, it has a lower project cost.

Now it’s your turn.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Q&A List

Do you have any question for clarification?

Questions/Issues Answers

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Keywords Index

Metals Ferrous Wrought Iron Cast Iron Steel


Alloys Non – Ferrous Aluminum Copper Lead Wood

Reinforcing Steel

STANDARD EXPERIMENTS

Refer to Laboratory Manual


Page 175 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Experiment numbers 21 – 26
BIG PICTURE
Week 8 to 9: Unit Learning Outcomes - 4 (ULO - 4): At the end of the unit, you are expected to:

a. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the properties and behaviors of most common and
advance construction material such as asphalts.
b. Conduct/Familiarize the methods, procedures and formulas of different experiments on common
construction materials according to international standards such as ASTM & AASTHO.

Big Picture in Focus

ULO-4a. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the properties and behaviors of


most common and advance construction material such as asphalts or bituminous materials.

Metalanguage

This section deals with the study of different types and properties of construction materials such as
asphalts.

Please proceed immediately to the “Essential Knowledge.”


Essential Knowledge

To perform the aforesaid big picture (unit learning outcomes) for the next (2) weeks of the course, you
need to fully understand the following essential knowledge that will be laid down in the succeeding
pages. Please note that you are not limited to exclusively refer to these resources. Thus, you are expected
to utilize other books, research articles and other resources that are available in the university’s library
e.g. ebrary, search.proquest.com etc.

INTRODUCTION: ASPHALT OR BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

Bituminous materials
Bituminous materials or asphalts are extensively used for roadway construction, primarily because of
their excellent binding characteristics and water proofing properties and relatively low cost. Bituminous
materials is generally used to denote substances in which bitumen is present or from which it can be derived.
Bitumen is defined as an amorphous, black or dark-colored, (solid, semi-solid, or viscous) cementitious
substance, composed principally of high molecular weight hydrocarbons, and soluble in carbon disulfide.
For civil engineering applications, bituminous materials include primarily of asphalts and tars. Asphalts
may occur in nature (natural asphalts) or may be obtained from petroleum processing (petroleum asphalts). Tars
do not occur in nature and are obtained as condensates in the processing of coal, petroleum, oil-shale, wood or
other organic materials. Pitch is formed when a tar is partially distilled so that the volatile constituents have
evaporated off from it. Bituminous mixtures are generally used to denote the combinations of bituminous
materials (as binders), aggregates and additives.

Classification of bituminous materials:

Page 176 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Production of Bitumen
Bitumen is the residue or by-product when the crude petroleum is refined. A wide variety of refinery
processes, such as the straight distillation process, solvent extraction process etc. may be used to produce
bitumen of different consistency and other desirable properties. Depending on the sources and characteristics of
the crude oils and on the properties of bitumen required, more than one processing method may be employed.

In the vacuum-steam distillation process the crude oil is heated and is introduced into a large cylindrical
still. Steam is introduced into the still to aid in the vaporization of the more volatile constituents of the petroleum
and to minimize decomposition of the distillates and residues. The volatile constituents are collected, condensed,
and the various fractions stored for further refining, if needed. The residues from this distillation are then fed
into a vacuum distillation unit, where residue pressure and steam will further separate out heavier gas oils. The
bottom fraction from this unit is the vacuum-steam-refined asphalt cement. The consistency of asphalt cement
from this process can be controlled by the amount of heavy gas oil removed. Normally, asphalt produced by this
process is softer. As the asphalt cools down to room temperature, it becomes a semi solid viscous material.
Different Forms of Bitumen

1. Cutback bitumen
Page 177 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

- is a range of binders that are produced by blending (mixing) penetration grade bitumen and a
hydrocarbon solvent, such as paraffin or mineral turpentine.
- cutback bitumen gets its name from the solvent that is involved in the process, because the solvent "cuts
back" or evaporates, leaving behind the binder to "get on with the job".
- the solvent used in cutback bitumen is called the "cutter" or "flux".
- three types of solvents are used for the blending process: slow-curing, medium-curing or rapid-curing
solvents.
- curing relates to the evaporation rate of the solvent which influences the setting time of the bitumen. The
viscosity of the cutback bitumen is determined by the proportion of solvent added: the higher the
proportion of solvent, the lower the viscosity of the cutback.
2. Bitumen Emulsion
- is a mixture of fine droplets of bitumen and water. But as the bitumen is a petroleum product it doesn’t
mix with water and as it is sticky in nature, it doesn’t easily gets disintegrated into fine droplets. To
overcome this problem an emulsifier is used.
- emulsifier can be defined as a surface-active agent. Emulsifier keeps the bitumen in its fine droplet state
by disallowing it to mix with other droplets.
- three types of bituminous emulsions are available, which are Rapid setting (RS), Medium setting (MS),
and Slow setting (SC).
- Rapid setting emulsions are used for surface dressing work. Medium setting emulsions are preferred for
premix jobs and patch repairs work. Slow setting emulsions are preferred in rainy season.
3. Bituminous Primers
- in bituminous primer the distillate is absorbed by the road surface on which it is spread. The absorption
therefore depends on the porosity of the surface.
- Bitumen primers are useful on the stabilized surfaces and water bound macadam base courses.
- Bituminous primers are generally prepared on road sites by mixing penetration bitumen with petroleum
distillate.
4. Modified Bitumen
- Certain additives or blend of additives called as bitumen modifiers can improve properties of Bitumen
and bituminous mixes. Bitumen treated with these modifiers is known as modified bitumen.
- Polymer modified bitumen (PMB)/ crumb rubber modified bitumen (CRMB) should be used only in
wearing course depending upon the requirements of extreme climatic variations.
- The advantages of using modified bitumen are as follows:
o Lower susceptibility to daily and seasonal temperature variations.
o Higher resistance to deformation at high pavement temperature.

Page 178 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

o Better age resistance properties.


o Higher fatigue life for mixes.
o Better adhesion between aggregates and binder.
o Prevention of cracking and reflective cracking.

Requirements of Bitumen

▪ The desirable properties of bitumen depend on the mix type and construction. In general,
Bitumen should possess following desirable properties.
o The bitumen should not be highly temperature susceptible: during the hottest weather
the mix should not become too soft or unstable, and during cold weather the mix should
not become too brittle causing cracks.
o The viscosity of the bitumen at the time of mixing and compaction should be adequate.
This can be achieved by use of cutbacks or emulsions of suitable grades or by heating the
bitumen and aggregates prior to mixing.
o There should be adequate affinity and adhesion between the bitumen and aggregates
used in the mix.

COMPOSITION OF ASPHALT

Asphalt Ingredients

There are actually two basic ingredients in asphalt. The first are aggregates; this is a mix of crushed
stone, gravel, and sand. Aggregates make up about 95% of hot mix asphalt pavement.The other 5% is bitumen.
Bitumen is the black or dark viscous material that holds the aggregates together, and is composed of polycyclic
hydrocarbons (a petroleum byproduct).For a deeper understanding of asphalt's ingredients, the elemental
components of asphalt include carbon, hydrogen, sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, and trace amounts of iron, nickel, and
vanadium.There are actually several different types of asphalt, and they are categorized by the process used to
bind aggregate with the bitumen.

Asphalt Durability

If you've ever been jarred by a crack in an asphalt road, you know that the material doesn't last forever.
The performance of asphalt can vary widely depending on a number of variables that include the presence of
moisture, temperature fluctuations, volume of traffic, and exposure to certain chemicals. Even varying asphalt
ingredients can determine its durability.

Because asphalt can hold the weight of vehicles, it is the material of choice for roads, parking lots, and
driveways. It can be applied rapidly and can be patched easily by pressing it directly into cracks and potholes.
Page 179 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Over time, asphalt ingredients can begin to erode and decay from heavy traffic, exposure to the elements,
and expansion and contraction. Because of this, the use of a sealcoat is absolutely essential to the proper
maintenance of any asphalt-paved surface. While there are a number of sealing products on the market, we only
recommend the use of coal tar asphalt sealer because of its ability to create an effective buffer against traffic,
water, oil salt, and other staining agents.

When asphalt ingredients aren't properly protected with a coat of sealer, they will inevitably crack.
Leaving even small cracks and fissures exposed and unrepaired will definitely lead to more serious damage such
as potholes, crumbling asphalt, and foundation damage. This ultimately results in the need for costly asphalt
replacement.

Asphalt's Most Effective Maintenance Strategy

For homeowners, it's important to understand the ingredients in asphalt because it does need to be
maintained on a regular schedule. An asphalt driveway can remain in good condition for decades if it is properly
cared for.

Knowing what can negatively affect asphalt ingredients is also important. Since oil, grease, gas, salt, and
transmission fluid can break down the quality of asphalt and ultimately result in cracking and crumbling, these
substances should be cleaned up quickly if spilled on asphalt.

Crack Filling

As part of preventative maintenance, asphalt should be inspected for cracks. Even small, hairline fissures
that go unrepaired or unfilled can cause the ingredients in asphalt to deteriorate. With all types of asphalt, a
certain amount of cracking is inevitable. The secret is to fill the cracks before they expand and turn into potholes
or larger areas of crumbling pavement. There are two types of crack filler that can be used on any asphalt or
concrete surface. Cold liquid pour asphalt crack fill is high effective in sealing cracks up to ½” in width. The
product is easy to use and keeps cracks on all types of asphalt sealed for several years.

Hot pour crackfill is commercial-grade rubberized asphalt crack sealer that works on cracks up to 1” in
width. It can be safely heated in a kettle or crack fill applicator melter and poured into cracks to seal out water,
ice, and debris. It will keep cracks sealed for up to four years.

Sealcoating

All asphalt types require proper maintenance and proactive repair to retain their appearance and overall
condition. Because of the nature of asphalt ingredients, driveways should be sealed every two to three years to

Page 180 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

prevent oxidation, loss of flexibility, cracking, and crumbling. At Asphalt Kingdom, we recommend the use of coal
tar sealer which protects the bitumen from oxidizing, becoming brittle, and cracking. It is easy to apply with
either a spray system or a squeegee and dries quickly in three to four hours.

Desirable Properties of Aggregates Selection of an aggregate material for use in an Asphalt Concrete
pavement depends on the availability, cost, and quality of the material, as well as the type of construction for
which it is intended. To determine if an aggregate material is suitable for use in asphalt construction, evaluate it
in terms of the following properties:

1. Size and grading. The maximum size of an aggregate is the smallest sieve through which 100 percent of the
material will pass. How the Asphalt Concrete is to be used determines not only the maximum aggregate size, but
also the desired gradation (distribution of sizes smaller than the maximum).

2. Cleanliness. Foreign or deleterious substances make some materials unsuitable for paving mixtures.

3.Toughness. Toughness or hardness is the ability of the aggregate to resist crushing or disintegration during
mixing, placing, and compacting; or under traffic loading.

4.Soundness. Although similar to toughness, soundness is the aggregate’s ability to resist deterioration caused
by natural elements such as the weather.

5.Particle shape. The shapes of aggregate particles influence the asphalt mixture’s overall strength and
workability as well as the density achieved during compaction. When compacted, irregular particles such as
crushed stone tend to “lock” together and resist displacement.

6.Surface texture. Workability and pavement strength are influenced by surface texture. A rough, sandpapery
texture results in a higher strength than a smooth texture. Although smooth-faced aggregates are easy to coat
with an asphalt film, they are generally not as good as rough surfaces. It is harder for the asphalt to “grip” the
smooth surface.

7.Absorption. The porosity of an aggregate permits the aggregate to absorb asphalt and form a bond between
the particle and the asphalt. A degree of porosity is desired, but aggregates that are highly absorbant are generally
not used.

8.Stripping. When the asphalt film separates from the aggregate because of the action of water, it is called
stripping. Aggregates coated with too much dust also can cause poor bonding which results in stripping.
Aggregates readily susceptible to stripping action usually are not suitable for asphalt.

KINDS AND USES OF ASPHALT

I. Porous Asphalt
Page 181 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Porous asphalt has been around since the mid 1970s. This type of asphalt is used in parking lots to enable water
to drain through the pavement.

II. Perpetual Pavement

Perpetual pavement is a multi-layer paving process designed for heavy loads and incorporates a strong, flexible
base to prevent, a strong permanent middle layer and the smooth top driving surface.

III. Hot Mix Asphalt

Hot mix asphalt is used for driveways, producing a strong, durable surface that is easy to repair and maintain,
withstands freezing and thawing.

IV. Warm-mix Asphalt

Warm-mix asphalt is produced the same way that hot-mix asphalt is, except it is 50-100 degrees Fahrenheit
lower. Reducing the temperature of the asphalt has a few benefits. These include reducing fuel consumption and
the production of greenhouse gases.

V. Quiet asphalt

Quiet asphalt is used to reduce the amount of noise pollution created by traffic on roads that are built through or
near residential areas.

VI. Thin overlays

Thin overlays improve ride quality and reduce pavement distress, noise levels, and life-cycle costs. It is produced
by using warm-mix asphalt and recycled materials.

Uses of Asphalt

The primary use (70%) of asphalt is in road construction, where it is used as the glue or binder mixed
with aggregate particles to create asphalt concrete.

a. Road Construction

Smooth asphalt reduces the friction between tires and roads, which means better fuel economy and reduced
carbon dioxide emissions.

b. Bituminous Waterproofing

Its other main uses are for bituminous waterproofing products, including production of roofing felt and for
sealing flat roofs.

Page 182 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

OTHER PRODUCT MADE WITH BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

Coal Tar Pitch

Coal tar pitch is dark brown to black hydrocarbon obtained


through the distillation of coke-oven tar. It is available in
several grades and is used as the basis for a number of
paints, roofing products, and waterproofing materials. It
has softening point near 150°F (65°C).

Coal tar pitch enamel is made from coal tar pitch with
added minerals fillers. It is used to protect pipe in pipeline work. Cold-applied coal tar products
have a solvent added to liquefy them. Hot-applied coal tar coatings give better protection than
cold coal tar coatings.

Felts

Felt is a sheet material made from the cellulose fibers of organic materials
such as wood, paper, rags, glass fibers, and asbestos.

Saturated felts, sometimes called tar paper, are made with an organic mat
saturated with a layer of thin asphalt. Tar paper is used as an underlayment
for shingles, as sheathing paper. And as limitations in built-up roof
construction. Tar paper is also used to produced roll roofing and shingles.

Ice and Water Shield

Ice and water shield is a roofing membrane composed of two


waterproofing materials bonded into one layer. Comprised of a
rubberized asphalt adhesive backed by a layer polyethylene. The
rubberized asphalt is backed by a release paper to protect the sticky side. The
material is used as waterproofing in cavity walls, and for trouble spots on
roofs, such as long eaves, in valleys and in others areas where leaks are more
likely.

Page 183 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Fiberglass Sheet material

Fiberglass mats can be impregnated with asphalt but are not “saturated”
because the glass fibers will not absorb the asphalt. The asphalt forms a coating on
the surface and fills the spaces between the fibers.

Fireproofing Paper

Fireproofing paper is made using asbestos fibers either in a


pressed mat-liked felt or in a woven sheet. The various sheet
products are used as underlayment for finished roofing
materials, as vapor barriers in walls and floors, and for other
similar applications. They should not be exposed to the weather
because coal tar pitch oxidizes rapidly when subjected to
the sun’s ultraviolet rays.

Waterproof Coatings

Asphalt waterproofing is used on masonry walls above and below grade.


Below grade, it is used to resist the pressure of subsurface water and
prevent it from passing through the foundation. As it is not subjected to
high temperatures below grade, asphalts with lower softening
points can be used. Above grade, it resists passage of water through walls
or roof decking. Where it will be exposed to sunlight, asphalts with a
higher softening point should be utilized.

A bituminous waterproofing coating is applied in one or more coats


mopped on either hot and cold. Cold-applied coats can be reinforced by the addition of glass, plastic, or asbestos
fibers. Cutbacks and emulsion are used extensively for this
purpose. They may be covered with a plastic or felt membrane.

A damp-roofing board product is made with an asphalt core


covered on both sides by layers of asphalt- impregnated
paper or felt treated with a weather-resistant coating.

Page 184 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

BITUMINOUS ROOF COVERING

The various types of bituminous roof-covering materials in common use. It should be noted that coal tar pitch
and asphalt are not compatible and should not be used where they will come in contact with each other.

Roll Roofing

Roll roofing uses either organic felt or fiberglass mats as a base material. A viscous bituminous coating is applied
to this base, forming the exposed surface. Roll roofing is made in four types: smooth surfaced, mineral surfaced,
mineral surfaced selvage edged, and pattern edged. Smooth-surfaced roll roofing has both sides covered with a
fine talc or mica to keep the surfaces from sticking as it is made into rolls.

Mineral-surfaced roll roofing has mineral granules in a wide range of colors rolled into the surface, producing a
surface that is attractive and protects the bitumen from sun’s ultraviolet rays. The mineral also increased the fire
resistance of the product.

Hot Bitumen Built-Up Roof Membrane

A built-up roof consists of alternate plies if organic or


fiberglass roofing felt with a hot bitumen coating
mopped over each layer. The design of the roof varies by
situation but generally consist of three or more layer of
felt with a bitumen layer over each and a bitumen
topcoat with aggregate rolled on top.

Felts provide the needed reinforcement to keep


bitumen in each layer from alligatoring. “Alligatoring”
refers to surface cracking caused by oxidation and
shrinkage stresses, which can result in a repetitive
mounding of the asphalt surface similar to an
alligator’s hide.

Modified Asphalt Roofing Systems

Page 185 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Modified asphalt roll roofing is composed of polymer-


modified bitumen reinforced with one or more plies of
fabric, such as polyester glass fiber. These membranes
are of uniform thickness and have consistent
physical properties throughout the membrane
area.

A variety of modifiers and types of reinforcing


plies are designed for use on almost every type of
construction assembly, including new roofing, re-
roofing, domes, and spires. Modified membrane are also used below grade for waterproofing canals, water
reservoirs, and landfills.

Most-modified bitumen membranes are made using either styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) or atactic poly-
propylene (APP). APP-modified membranes are generally using a propane torch to heat and soften the underside
of the membrane. This surface becomes a molten adhesive that is placed on the substrate, rolled for adhesion,
and bonds when it cools. SBS modifies the bitumen membranes by forming a polymer lattice within the bitumen.
When this polymer lattice cools, the membrane acts like a rubber. SBS membranes are more flexible than APP
membranes and are used where flexibility is needed, such as when the substrate may be subject to movement or
deflection. SBS-modified membranes are mopped in hot asphalt, self-adhered, or adhered with cold-process
adhesives. Some types can have their joint heat-welded. Some have factory-applied mineral aggregates surfaces
to protect them from ultraviolet damage. Those without this covering need some form of ultraviolet protective
coating.

Cold-Applied Asphalt Roofing System


Cold-applied systems use some form of coated base sheet, fabric, or similar reinforcement over which the
principal waterproofing agent, which is applied at ambient temperature. The selection of the cold-process
application depends on the level of maintenance, repair, and service expected, and on the compatibility between
the cold-applied materials and any existing substrate

Page 186 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

The reinforcing felts and fabrics include


organic-coated base sheets, organic
mineral-surfaced cap sheets, organic felt
sheets, fiberglass ply sheets, fiberglass
base sheet, fiber glass mineral- surfaced cap
sheet s, single-ply smooth surfaced sheets,
fiberglass fabrics, polyester fabric, cotton fabric,
and jute burlap fabric. The base sheet, cap
sheet, and single-ply roofing are bonded with
cold-applied adhesives and cold- applied
surface coatings to forms a roof membrane.

The coating and adhesives are designed to


be brushed or sprayed at normal room temperatures. These include filled and non-filled asphalt cutbacks, asphalt
emulsion, coal tar coatings, and aluminum pigmented asphalt. Toppings include gravel and aluminum chips
places in the topcoat while it is still wet. They block ultraviolet light, can reflect heat, and are decorative.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN ASPHALT AND BITUMEN

Bitumen is the liquid binder that holds asphalt together. A bitumen-sealed surface is a layer of bitumen sprayed
and then covered with an aggregate. This is then repeated to give a two-coat seal. Asphalt is produced in a plant
that heats, dries and mixes aggregate, bitumen and sand into a composite.

The process flow of any asphalt plant will depend on the type of the plant. There are two major types /
categories: batch type and continuous type.

1.CONTINUOUS ASPHALT PLANT PROCESS FLOW

The starting point of the asphalt drum mix plant process is the continuous feeding of cold aggregates into the
feeder bins. Aggregates have to be fed as per the size into different feeder bins. The number of bins are three,
four or even more. The flow of aggregates from individual bins are controlled as required by the mix material
design. This flow is also controlled and regulated from the control panel.

Primary vibrating screen will screen the over sized material and aggregates will enter the drum for heating and
then mixing. The drum mixer will evenly apply heat to the aggregates and then coat it uniformly with bitumen as

Page 187 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

aggregates pass from one end of the drum. The drum unit is inclined and rotating that facilitates easy flow of
aggregates from one end to the other. Fuel for bitumen tank drum burner is stored in a separate tank.

Bitumen and filler material are the ones that are added into the drum for mixing with aggregates. Bitumen is
stored in separate tanks and then added into the drum by a pipe line by a bitumen pump controlled by a variable
speed drive motor. Filler material is stored in separate filler hopper and transferred by means of a compressor.

Pollution control is taken care by dry and wet type pollution control devices. After proper mixing, the hot mix is
discharged to the other end of the drum and onto a conveyor. This conveyor takes the HMA into the waiting
trucks or storage silos. All these processes are controlled by a computerized control panel that comes with the
asphalt mix plant.

2.BATCH ASPHALT PLANT PROCESS FLOW

The process or flow for the asphalt plant – batch type starts the same way as we have to feed the aggregates into
separate feeder bins. The aggregates then pass through a primary vibrating screen that helps in removal of
oversized material. After that the aggregates are treated to heat in a drum which is fitted with a burner unit.

Dust suction is done at the entry point of the aggregates into the drum and the dust absorbed is treated by pre-
separator and then by a bag filter unit.

The heated aggregates are then transferred to the top of mixing tower into the vibrating screen. Vibrating screen
has screens of different sizes laid out for separation of aggregates. After separation, aggregates are stored into
different bins as per their size. This area is called hot bins and it is just below the vibrating screens.

On the other hand, bitumen which is stored in the storage tanks is transferred to the weigh hopper near the
mixing unit. Same happens for filler material as it gets transferred to its weigh hopper. Aggregates will be
weighed and then discharged into the mixing unit by opening of pneumatic cylinders as set in the control panel.
Bitumen and filler material are also added by weight into the mixing unit to complete the batch. Batch mixing
time is set in the control panel and after the mixing time is over, the pneumatic gates below the mixing unit will
open leading to the discharge of hot mix asphalt into the storage silo or directly into waiting trucks.

BATCH PLANTS

This is the most widespread type of asphalt plant in the world, which guarantees the highest level of flexibility in
production and quality of the finished product. The batches depend on the type of production: every 40-50

Page 188 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

seconds a complete batch is produced, after all the individual components have been weighed and metered
separately.

This type of plant is a must for producers who work for several clients at the same time, because the specifications
can be easily changed, while maintaining a high level of quality.

CONTINUOUS PLANTS

In continuous plants there is no interruption in the production cycle as the rhythm of production is not broken
into batches. The mixing of the material takes place inside the dryer drum which is elongated, as it dries and
mixes the material at the same time.

Since there are no mixing tower or elevators, the system is therefore considerably simplified, with a consequent
reduction in the cost of maintenance.

The absence of the screen however makes it necessary to have precise controls at the beginning of the production
cycle, before the aggregates are fed into the dryer and before they are consequently discharged from the dryer
as asphalt.

AGGREGATE METERING
In both types of plant, the production cycle begins with the cold feeders, where the aggregates are generally
metered by volume; if required, the sand extractor can be fitted with a weigh-belt for metering.

Control of the total weight of the virgin aggregates, however, is effected in two different phases of the production
cycle in the two different plants. In the continuous type there is a feed belt, before the moist aggregates are fed
into the dryer drum, where the moisture content is set manually in order to allow for the weight of water to be
subtracted. Therefore it is extremely important for the moisture content in the aggregates, particularly the sand,
to have a constant value which is continually monitored through frequent laboratory tests.

In batch type plants the weight of the aggregates is checked after drying, before they are fed into the mixer. The
weighing, therefore, in the weigh hopper is not influenced by moisture or by variable factors, such as changeable
weather conditions.

Furthermore, in batch type plants, the presence of the screen means there is more accuracy in the selection of
materials before mixing, therefore making the quality of the finished product more consistent. Inaccuracies are
also avoided – such as large aggregates ending up by mistake in the sand hopper, or inconsistencies in the supply
of aggregates, or possible errors preset in the formula at the cold feeders.

Page 189 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

For this reason, in the specifications of many countries, where quarries do not enforce adequate and strict control
procedures required for the production of asphalt, batch type plants are a compulsory requirement.

BITUMEN METERING
In batch type asphalt plants the bitumen is metered by weight through load cells in the weigh hopper. The
computer system ensures that the exact quantity is fed into the mixer, calculated on the basis of the specifications
and the actual weight of the aggregates.

In continuous plants the metering is generally volumetric through a litre-counter subsequent to the feed pump.
Alternatively, it is possible to install a mass counter, a necessary choice if modified bitumen is used, which
requires frequent cleaning operations.

FILLER METERING
In batch plants, the filler is metered by weight in the weigh hopper, where the recovered fines and imported fines
can be separately controlled, thereby making the metering process very precise. The filler is then fed into the
mixer with its own screw conveyor or by gravity.

In continuous plants the metering system is normally volumetric, using variable-speed feed screws which have
replaced the previous pneumatic metering system.

In the end it is the client’s decision to whether use the batch or the continuous asphalt mixing plant.

LABORATORY TESTS FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

◼ QUALITY TEST

Lab Tests On Bitumen To Check Quality

Various tests are conducted on bitumen to assess its consistency, gradation, viscosity, temperature susceptibility,
and safety.

There are a number of tests to assess the properties of bituminous materials. The following tests are usually
conducted to evaluate different properties of bituminous materials.

1. Penetration test
2. Ductility test
3. Softening point test
4. Specific gravity test
5. Viscosity test
6. Flash and Fire point test
Page 190 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

7. Float test
8. Water content test
9. Loss on heating test

Penetration Test

It measures the hardness or softness of bitumen by measuring the depth in tenths of a millimeter to which a
standard loaded needle will penetrate vertically in 5 seconds. BIS had standardized the equipment and test
procedure.

The penetrometer consists of a needle assembly with a total weight of 100g and a device for releasing and locking
in any position. The bitumen is softened to a pouring consistency, stirred thoroughly and poured into containers
at a depth at least 15 mm in excess of the expected penetration. The test should be conducted at a specified
temperature of 250C.

It may be noted that penetration value is largely influenced by any inaccuracy with regards to pouring
temperature, size of the needle, weight placed on the needle and the test temperature.

In hot climates, a lower penetration grade is preferred. The Fig-1 shows a schematic

Penetration Test setup.

Fig-1 Penetration Test Setup

Ductility Test

Ductility is the property of bitumen that permits it to undergo great deformation or elongation. Ductility is
defined as the distance in cm, to which a standard sample or briquette of the material will be elongated without
Page 191 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

breaking. Dimension of the briquette thus formed is exactly 1 cm square. The bitumen sample is heated and
poured in the mould assembly placed on a plate. These samples with moulds are cooled in the air and then in
water bath at 270C temperature. The excess bitumen is cut and the surface is leveled using a hot knife. Then the
mould with assembly containing sample is kept in water bath of the ductility machine for about 90 minutes. The
sides of the moulds are removed, the clips are hooked on the machine and the machine is operated. The distance
up to the point of breaking of thread is the ductility value which is reported in cm.

The ductility value gets affected by factors such as pouring temperature, test temperature, rate of pulling etc.A
minimum ductility value of 75 cm has been specified by the BIS. Fig-2 shows ductility Test Process.

Fig-2 Ductility Test

Softening Point Test

Softening point denotes the temperature at which the bitumen attains a particular degree of softening under the
specified condition of test.

The test is conducted by using Ring and Ball apparatus. A brass ring containing test sample of bitumen is
suspended in liquid like water or glycerin at a given temperature. A steel ball is placed upon the bitumen sample

Page 192 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

and the liquid medium is heated at a rate of 50C per minute. Temperature is noted when the softened bitumen
touches the metal plate which is at a specified distance below.

Generally, higher softening point indicates lower temperature susceptibility and is preferred in hot climates. Fig-
3 shows Softening Point test setup.

Fig-3 Softening Point Test Setup

Specific Gravity Test

The specific gravity of bitumen is defined as the ratio of mass of given volume of bitumen of known content to
the mass of equal volume of water at 270C. The specific gravity can be measured using either pycnometer or
preparing a cube specimen of bitumen in semi solid or solid state.

In paving jobs, to classify a binder, density property is of great use. In most cases bitumen is weighed, but when
used with aggregates, the bitumen is converted to volume using density values.

The density of bitumen is greatly influenced by its chemical composition. Increase in aromatic type mineral
impurities cause an increase in specific gravity.

The specific gravity of bitumen varies from 0.97 to 1.02.


Page 193 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Viscosity Test

Fig-4 Viscosity Test

Viscosity denotes the fluid property of bituminous material and it is a measure of resistance to flow. At the
application temperature, this characteristic greatly influences the strength of resulting paving mixes.

Low or high viscosity during compaction or mixing has been observed to result in lower stability values. At high
viscosity, it resists the compactive effort and thereby resulting mix is heterogeneous, hence low stability values.
And at low viscosity instead of providing a uniform film over aggregates, it will lubricate the aggregate particles.

Orifice type viscometers are used to indirectly find the viscosity of liquid binders like cutbacks and emulsions.

The viscosity expressed in seconds is the time taken by the 50 ml bitumen material to pass through the orifice of
a cup, under standard test conditions and specified temperature. Viscosity of a cutback can be measured with
either 4.0 mm orifice at 250C or 10 mm orifice at 25 or 400C.

Flash and Fire Point Test

At high temperatures depending upon the grades of bitumen materials leave out volatiles. And these volatiles
catch fire which is very hazardous and therefore it is essential to qualify this temperature for each bitumen grade.

Page 194 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

BIS defined the ash point as the temperature at which the vapour of bitumen momentarily catches fire in the
form of ash under specified test conditions. The fire point is defined as the lowest temperature under specified
test conditions at which the bituminous material gets ignited and burns.

Float Test

Normally the consistency of bituminous material can be measured either by penetration test or viscosity test.
But for certain range of consistencies, these tests are not applicable and Float test is used.

The apparatus consists of an aluminum oat and a brass collar filled with bitumen to be tested. The specimen in
the mould is cooled to a temperature of 50C and screwed in to oat. The total test assembly is floated in the water
bath at 500C and the time required for water to pass its way through the specimen plug is noted in seconds and
is expressed as the oat value.

Water Content Test

It is desirable that the bitumen contains minimum water content to prevent foaming of the bitumen when it is
heated above the boiling point of water.

The water in bitumen is determined by mixing known weight of specimen in a pure petroleum distillate free from
water, heating and distilling of the water. The weight of the water condensed and collected is expressed as
percentage by weight of the original sample.

The allowable maximum water content should not be more than 0.2% by weight.

Loss on Heating Test

When the bitumen is heated it loses the volatility and gets hardened. About 50gm of the sample is weighed and
heated to a temperature of 1630C for 5 hours in a specified oven designed for this test. The sample specimen is
weighed again after the heating period and loss in weight is expressed as percentage by weight of the original
sample.

Bitumen used in pavement mixes should not indicate more than 1% loss in weight, but for bitumen having
penetration values 150-200 up to 2% loss in weight is allowed.

Different Methods of Grading of Bitumen


Following are the different methods used for grading of bitumen

1. Grading by chewing
2. Penetration grading
3. Viscosity grading

Page 195 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

4. Superpave performance grade

Grading of Bitumen by Chewing


During the 19th century, chewing was the method used to determine the stiffness i.e. hardness if the bitumen.
This was the time when no penetration test was developed. It was carried out by experienced US inspectors.
Based on the test conducted, the sample was either accepted or rejected. The temperature of bitumen tested was
such that, it favors human body temperature.

Penetration Grading of Bitumen

The American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) D 04 carried out bitumen grading at a temperature of 25
degree Celsius for the testing of the road and pavement materials in 1903.

The penetration test involves penetration of a needle that is loaded by 100g, into a bitumen sample maintained
at a temperature of 25-degree Celsius in a water bath for a period of 5 seconds. The penetration value is measured
in millimeters.

1 penetration unit = 0.1mm.

The greater the penetration value, the softer the bitumen become. The ASTM standard D 946 gives 5 penetration
grades for the bitumen binders. They are:

1. Hardest Bitumen Grade 40 –50

2. 60 –70

3. 85-100

4. 120-150

5. Softest Bitumen Grade 200-300


The penetration grading system is 100 years old bitumen grading method. In India, before 2006, the most widely
used grade of bitumen was 60 to 70. For the construction of low volume roads and to perform spraying,
penetration value from 80 to 100 was used.

Viscosity Grading of Bitumen


In the 1970s, US introduced the method of viscosity grading at 60 degree Celsius. This was to ensure a solution
for construction problems and to have high temperature performance. These were tender mixes that must
undergo mix pushing and shoving under the roller, without which it cannot be rolled properly.

Page 196 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Prior to 1970s, the US construction used 60 to 70 penetration grade that shows variation towards rutting action.
They showed lower viscosity at 135 degree Celsius. This caused tender mix problems during the construction
process.

The viscosity test, unlike penetration grading, is a fundamental test carried out at 60 degree Celsius. This
temperature is the maximum temperature to which the road pavement is subjected to at summer. The
measurement is in terms of Poise.

In India, the equipment for testing the viscosity at 60 and 135 degrees are available. They are very simple to
handle with. In the US, Six Asphalt Cement (AC) viscosity grades were specified. They are,

Grade Viscosity at 60 degree Celsius, Poises

AC -2.5 SOFTEST 250±/-50

AC-5 500±/-100

AC-10 1000±/-200

AC-20 2000±/-400

AC-30 3000±/-600

AC-40 HARDEST 4000 ±/-800

In the US, Bitumen is mentioned as asphalt cement or asphalt. The grades with lower viscosity i.e. AC-2.5 and AC-
5 were used for cold service temperatures; areas like Canada. In Northern tier states, AC-10 was used. Mostly in
the US, AC-2- was used.

Only five grades excluding AC-30 was initially determined. These have a mean viscosity that will double from
grade to grade. This resulted in no overlap in viscosity range. But the problem of AC-20 to be too soft and AC-40
to be too hard, that was faced by countries Florida, Georgia, and Alabama made AC-30 to be incorporated and
hence six grades.

Page 197 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

The figure below shows the AC-30 bitumen viscosity grade which is equivalent to VG-30 in India

Fig.5: Graph representing temperature and stiffness (in terms of viscosity) relationship of AC-30 (VG-30)
Bitumen
Superpave Performance Grading of Bitumen
The performance grading of bitumen is based on the evaluation of the material performance when in use, unlike
being rational as in viscosity grading system. The viscosity grading system is more into experience based method
of grading. And this has proved to have excellent performance for over 20 years in US pavement construction.

The Superpave grading was developed as a part of a 5year strategic highway research planning (SHRP) from
1987 to 1992, to have a performance based grading system for bitumen. These were developed based on the
engineering features that will help in solving many of the engineering problems.

Features of Superpave Performance Grading of Bitumen

The Superpave performance grading system make use of a new set of bitumen tests. The method incorporates
the following salient features:

• The system includes tests and specification for bitumen binders. This bitumen binder may have either
modified or unmodified bitumen.

• The field performance by the engineering principles will influence the physical properties determined
from the Superpave bitumen tests. That is, it is not achieved by experience alone.

Page 198 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

• The bitumen simulation for a period of 5 to 10 years, to understand its performance with age was
developed. This is a long-term bitumen aging test.

• The tests and specification of Superpave system intend to avoid three main damages in bitumen i.e.
raveling, fatigue cracking and thermal cracking. These failures happen at high, intermediate and low
temperature respectively.

• The pavement is taken for testing for the entire range of temperature as shown in the figure below. A
rotational viscometer is taken to determine the viscosity at 135 degree Celsius. The viscoelastic property
of bitumen at two temperatures is determined with the help of a dynamic shear rheometer. The first
temperature is “high temperatures” maximum 7-day temperature during a hot summer day of the project
site. The second one is “intermediate temperature”, which is the average annual temperature of the
pavement at the project site.

• During Winter a bending beam rheometer and direct tension tester are used to measure the bitumen
rheological properties at the project site.

Fig.6: The testing carried on the pavement at project site for entire range of temperature in a Superpave
grading system (As per FHWA)
The performance of Superpave is dependent on climate. The Superpave performance grade (PG) for project
location where the temperature during 7 days is greater than 64 degree Celsius and a minimum temperature of
-22 degrees are PG 64 to 22.

The available higher grades are PG 52, PG 58, PG 64, PG 70, PG 76 and PG 82. The lower grades are -4, -10, -16, -
22, -28, -34 and so on. Both the temperature levels increment at a rate of 6 degrees.

If in Rajasthan the project site has maximum 7-day record temperature of pavement as 70 degrees and a
minimum temperature of -3 degree, PG 70 to 4 bitumen will be specified for that project.
Page 199 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

EXTRACTION METHOD

Bitumen Extraction test is used to determine the amount of bitumen that is actually used as binding content in
asphaltic pavement or asphaltic concrete recently laid at site. The durability, compatibility and resistance from
defects like rutting, bleeding, raveling and ageing of flexible asphaltic roads is highly dependent on the amount
of the bitumen used for the coating of the filler aggregates used in the asphaltic matrix.

So this test is parallel to that of the cylindrical compression test of the actual concrete samples obtained at site
before placement of concrete to determine its actual compressive strength to be as per the required mix design.

The mix design of asphalt is carried out by series of hit and trial in job mix formula for determination of the
optimum binder content. So at site, before final payment to the contractor it must be ensured that the amount of
bitumen required by the mix design is actually used at site or not.

Apparatus for the Bitumen Extraction Test

The equipment needed for this test method are:

1. ) Oven a well maintained oven is needed cable of maintaining the temperature at 110 degrees.

2. ) A flat pan for carrying the test specimens.

3. ) Balance or scales capable of weighing the sample to an accuracy of 0.05 % of its mass.

4. ) Extraction apparatus, consisting of a bowl and an apparatus in which the bowl may be revolved at
controlled variable speeds up to 3600 revolutions per minute.

Page 200 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

5. ) Filter ring or filter paper to fit in the trim of the bowl.

Generally there are two method used for the bitumen extraction test:

1.) Centrifuge Method

2.) Extraction Bottle Method

In most parts of the world the first method i.e. Centrifuge Method is usually used so for today’s post I would also
be dealing only the Centrifuge method for Bitumen Extraction Test and is standardized by American Society for
Testing Materials ASTM 2172. This method actually uses the generic process of cold solvent extraction method.

The background of this test is that a solvent is used to immerse the sample and then by centrifuging all the
bitumen is extracted / removed isolating the mineral aggregates. The weight of those aggregates is subtracted

from the total weight of the sample to get the weight of the bitumen in the sample expressed as percentage binder
content.

Bitumen Extraction Test by Centrifuge Method

1.) Sample Preparation

The sample can either be taken from the asphalt plant or from the dump truck at site depending on the site
situation. As the results obtained from the test sample may be affected by the age of the material; thus for best
results the test must be carried out on mixtures and pavement shortly after their preparation.

If the sample is not soft enough so as to get separated by a spatula, it must be placed on a flat pan and then
warmed at a temperature of 1100C plus or minus 5 0C in the oven till it can be handled or separated.

Page 201 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

From that a representative sample is taken of the size in accordance with the nominal maximum size of the
aggregates in the mix. If the sample has aggregates of 4.75 mm than 0.5 kg of sample is sufficient but if it had
aggregates of 37.5 mm or so a 4 kg sample must be taken. As a guide you can follow this table.

The sample taken is weighed to the nearest of 0.05% of its mass and is recorded as W1 and is then placed in the
bowl for the extraction machine.

The sample is then immersed or covered with the solvent that can be petrol of about 5 liters or it is better to add
commercial grade tricholoroethylene or Benzene and let the mixture stand for about an hour. The purpose of
solvent is to disintegrate the test portion.

An oven dried filter ring is taken and its initial weight is recorded. The temperature of oven for drying the ring is
kept at 110 plus minus 50 The edge of the bowl is covered with this filter ring.

The bowl is then covered with a steel cover and is clamped tightly before placing in the apparatus. A beaker or a
clean container is placed underneath the drain outlet of the centrifuge apparatus for collection of the extract
(mixture of solvent and bitumen).

2.) Centrifuge the Sample

The next step is to centrifuge the apparatus, the bowl is placed in the apparatus and the machine is started to
revolve. The speed is gradually increased till a maximum speed of 3600 rev/min is attained.

The machine is allowed to revolve till solvent ceases to flow from the drain outlet.

Allow the machine to stop and additional solvent is added in quantity of 200 ml or more depending on the amount
of the sample.

The solvent is added again and again with minimum of 3 cycles till the color of extract coming out from the drain
outlet is clear and not darker than a light straw color.

The filter paper is carefully removed from the bowl or container along with the residual aggregate in a metal pan;
which is afterwards dried in air and in the oven at a constant temperature around 1100

The fine fragments of mineral aggregates that are attached with the filter are carefully scratched and then the
weight of the filter and aggregate are noted.

Calculations & Report

The bitumen content obtained as a result of the bitumen extraction test is calculated and reported as follows:-

Bitumen content (grams) =( W1-(W2+W3))/W1

Page 202 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Where,

W1 = weight of the sample test portion in grams

W2 = Weight of the extracted mineral aggregate in grams.

W3 = weight of the fine aggregate fragments in grams

Result :

The bitumen content may be expressed as a percentage of weight of bitumen with respect total weight of the mix
or with respect to total aggregate in the mix.

Bitumen content % by weight of total mix = (bitumen content in grams / W1) x 100

Precautions

This test may involve hazardous materials, operation and equipment. Safety precautions must be exercised at all
times. The inhalation of solvent fumes may be particularly harmful and therefore it is advised that the area where
the extraction test is carried out is well ventilated and that an adequate extractor fan is provided.

Balances should be calibrated using reference weight once every twelve month.

Marshall Stability and Flow

The Marshall test method is widely used for the design and control of asphaltic concrete and hot rolled asphalt
materials. It cannot be applied to open textured materials such as bitumen macadam. Materials containing

Page 203 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

aggregate sizes larger than 20 mm, are liable to give erratic results.
The full Marshall method is a method of bituminous mix design in addition to being a quality control test. The
details given below related mainly to its use as a quality control test. The suitability of materials for the design of
Marshall asphalt requires that a number of tests are performed on the materials.

Apparatus

The samples are prepared in 100 mm diameter moulds which are fitted with a base and collar (Figure 10.9.1) the
sample is compacted using a hammer consisting of a sliding weight which falls onto a circular foot (Figure 10.9.2)
during compaction the mould is held on a hardwood block which is rigidly fixed to a concrete base (Figure 10.9.3).

The sample is removed from the mould using an extraction plate and press (Figure 10.9.1) and heated to the test
temperature of 60° C in a water bath. The cylindrical specimens are tested on their sides between test heads
similar to those shown in Fig. 10.9.4. The flow is measured with a dial gauge and the stability is measured with a
proving ring. A motorised load frame is required for the test.

Sampling
Due to the various uses which may be made of Marshall tests, the materials for test may be obtained in one of the
following forms:

a) 100 mm diameter bituminous cores cut from an existing pavement using a core cutting machine.

b) Ready-mixed bituminous material obtained from a mixing plant or at the point of laying, and sampled

c) A sample of mixed aggregate obtained from the mixing plant together with a separate sample of bitumen
obtained from the storage tank at the mixing plant.

Page 204 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

A sample of mixed aggregate may be obtained from a mixing plant by batching the specified aggregate weights
into the mixer but not allowing any bitumen to be batched. The aggregate sample is then discharged into a clean
lorry where it may be sampled in accordance with Chapter 2.d) Samples of the various sized aggregates in use at
the mixing plant sampled in accordance with Chapter 2 together with a separate sample of bitumen sampled in
accordance with Chapter 2. In the case of a sample of type (a), the core may be tested without further preparation.
It must, however, be of the correct diameter and height.

It is doubtful if samples obtained in this manner give results which are closely comparable to laboratory
compacted specimens; however, the taking of cores is a valuable way to check the compacted density of the ‘as
laid’ material and the small amount of additional work in determining the stability and flow is justified. If the
densities obtained form cores (or sand replacement tests) are significantly below those of laboratory compacted
specimens, attention should be paid to the methods of laying and compacting.

For many quality control purposes samples of type (b) are the most useful as they may be compacted, after re-
heating in an oven to the required temperature. The delay between initial mixing and compacting should be as
short as possible. With this type of sample separate test on the mixed aggregate will be required to determine
the void content. It is essential to make frequent checks on the combined aggregate from an asphalt plant. The

Page 205 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

most important factors to be checked are the aggregate temperature at the time of mixing and the grading of the
mixed aggregate.

It may, therefore, be convenient to obtain separate samples of aggregate and bitumen (type (c) sample) and mix
them in the required proportions in the laboratory. As the aggregate will be discharged from the mixer in a dry
state, there is considerable risk of segregation and the greatest care should be taken in obtaining a representative
sample.

If there are reasons to suspect that the bitumen at the mixing plant has been overheated, it may be worthwhile
to check the penetration as excessive heating hardens the bitumen. One particular use of this method of sampling
is that if some adjustment is required to the bitumen content, a number of samples may be made at various
bitumen contents to determine which is the most satisfactory. To maintain the quality of a bituminous material,
it is necessary to check, at regular intervals, the various sizes of aggregate for grading, cleanliness, shape, strength
etc. If it is required to study the effects of varying the aggregate, or bitumen proportions, it will be necessary to
obtain separate samples of each.

Sample Preparation

If necessary, the aggregates should be oven-dried at 150°C before testing commences. (Sample types (c) and (d)).

For samples of type (d) it is first necessary to combine the various sample sizes to give the required grading for
the mixed aggregate. Several different gradings may be tried if a full Marshall mix design is to be carried out.
When it is required to determine the most satisfactory bitumen content, given a sample of mixed aggregate, an
initial estimate of the required bitumen content can be made from a knowledge of the compacted density of the
Mixed Aggregate (CDMA).

The CDMA is most conveniently determined using a standard 100 mm. diameter compaction mould and a 2.5 kg
compaction hammer. The sample of dry aggregate is compacted in the mould in four layers, each layer being
given 20 blows of the hammer. The density of the aggregate is then calculated in an identical manner to the bulk
density in a compaction tests. The average of two determinations is taken as the CDMA, as shown in Form 10.9.1.

It is also necessary to carry out separate determinations of the specific gravity of the mixed aggregate (SGMA),
and the specific gravity of bitumen. The voids in mixed aggregate VMA are then determined from the formula:

VMA CDMA SGMA= X(SGMA −100%

The VMA should normally be between 17 and 20% for a satisfactory mix. An initial estimate of the optimum
bitumen content (B) is obtained from the formulae :

BVMA VIM x S G Bitumen CDMA 100 ( − ) . .

Page 206 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Where, B100 is expressed in parts per 100 parts of mixed aggregate (p.h.a) and VIM = the specified percentage
of air voids in the compacted mix.

Note. In bitumen calculations, it is usual to express all densities and specific gravities in gram/ml; gram/cc or
Mg/cu.m. Having completed the required tests on the mixed aggregates, the bituminous material is then
produced by mixing the aggregates with the bitumen in the correct proportions.

Self-Help: You can also refer to the sources below to help you further understand the lesson:

Kultermann E. and Spence, William. (2017). Construction Materials, Methods, and


Techniques: Building a sustainable future. 4th Edition. Australia: Cencage Learning

Ahmed, A. and Sturges, J. (2015). Materials science in construction: an introduction.


Abingdon, Oxon; New York, NY: Routledge

Let’s Check Activity 1. Now that you know some types and properties of common construction
materials let us try to check how far you had learned. In the space provided, write the term/s
being asked in the following statements:
______________1. It is a composite material made up of mineral aggregates and bitumen commonly used for
roads, parking lots and airports and also known as blacktop.

_____________ 2. HMA or hot mix asphalt is made of how many percent of aggregates?
_____________ 3. It influences the asphalt mixture’s overall strength and workability as well as the density
achieved during compaction.
____________ 4. This type of asphalt is used in parking lots to enable water to drain through the pavement.

____________ 5. It is used for driveways, producing a strong, durable surface that is easy to repair and
maintain, withstands freezing and thawing.
____________ 6. It is a multi-layer paving process designed for heavy loads and incorporates a strong, flexible
base to prevent, a strong permanent middle layer and the smooth top driving surface.
____________ 7. Another main uses or primary use of asphalt, including production of roofing
felt and for sealing flat roofs.
____________ 8. This method is used to determine the amount of bitumen that is actually used as binding
content in asphaltic pavement or asphaltic concrete recently laid at site.
_____________ 9. In batch type asphalt plant, the bitumen is metered by what?
_____________ 10. It measures the hardness or softness of bitumen by measuring the depth in tenths of a
millimeter to which a standard loaded needle will penetrate vertically in 5 seconds.
Let’s Analyze
Activity 1. Getting acquainted with the types and properties of some common and advanced
construction materials. what also matters is you should also be able to explain some its
properties. Now, choose 5 most important properties of asphalt which you believe are essential
in determining its suitability for intended used in a road construction. Why?

Page 207 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)


lOMoARcPSD|36395062

College of Engineering Education


2nd Floor, BE Building
Matina Campus, Davao City
Telefax: (082)296-1084
Phone No.: (082)300-5456/300-0647 Local 131

Activity 2. Why is it important to conduct Marshall Stability Test for Asphalt?

In a Nutshell

Activity 1. The study of types and properties of construction materials I such as asphalt or
bituminous materials very important.

Based on the topics presented and learning exercises that you have done, please feel free to write
some advantages of bituminous road construction over concrete pavement. I have indicated my
lessons learned.

1. It provides a smooth surface to ride.


2. It gives less sound emission when compared with concrete pavement.

Now it’s your turn.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8
9.
10.
Q&A List

Do you have any question for clarification?

Questions/Issues Answers

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Keywords Index

Asphalt Bituminous Material Continuous Asphalt Plant Batch Asphalt Plant


Aggregate Metering

Page 208 of 208

Downloaded by Cj Ponce (cjponce489@gmail.com)

You might also like